JP6508646B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Patent Document 1, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rendering device on the front door. According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform various effects using the effect device, and the interest of the game can be improved.

JP 2012-245279 A

  However, since the front door faces the player, it is in a state of being easily subjected to an external force by contact with the player, and therefore it is necessary to secure the durability. There is a problem that the durability of the door is reduced. In particular, in the case of providing a protruding portion projecting on the front surface, the possibility of contact is increased, so that more durability is required.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of securing high durability even with a door having a portion projecting to the front.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(I) A door that can open and close the front of the case,
And a decorative protrusion protruding forward from the top of the door;
The decorative convex portion is formed by a decorative unit provided from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex portion, with a light guide plate of a seamless structure for diffusing light and uniformly emitting light from the surface of the decorative convex portion ,
The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by a top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door, and a top lens cover that transmits the light to the outside, and the light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion.
A game machine characterized by
(II) The gaming machine of (I) above,
The decoration unit is
The front region is curved downward, and the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and the front end central portion is formed to have an apex.
The rear surface of the front area and the frame of the door are connected by a decoration unit support mechanism horizontally disposed.

  The invention of (1) has a door capable of opening and closing the front side of the case and a decorative convex portion projected forward from the upper portion of the door, and the decorative convex portion diffuses light. A gaming machine characterized in that a light guide plate of a seamless structure for uniformly releasing from the surface of the decorative convex portion is formed by a decorative unit provided from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex portion.

  According to the above configuration, when a plurality of parts are joined to form the light guide plate of the decoration unit, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the parts. For example, it is possible to avoid the situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit having the light guide plate of the seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, and thus an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. Even in such a case, it becomes difficult to cause deformation or breakage, and as a result, it is possible to increase the durability of the door.

  In the invention of (2), the decoration unit in the invention of (1) is hollow by the top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door, and the top lens cover for transmitting the light to the outside. The light guide plate is housed in the hollow portion, the front region is curved downward, the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and the apex is at the center of the front end The back surface of the front area and the frame of the door are connected by a horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism.

  According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the light guide plate are simply stacked by housing the light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover. It is possible to form a decorative convex portion that is higher in rigidity than in the case of the plate shape. Also, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end away from the rear end connected to the frame of the door, but by reducing the width in the lateral direction on the front end side to reduce the weight, the rigidity of the front region and It is possible to increase the strength.

  Further, the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit curved downward is connected to the frame of the door via the decoration unit support mechanism arranged horizontally, whereby the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit is supported by the decoration unit support structure Horizontally supported, the front region has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. Thereby, even when external force is applied from the player or the like to the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit, it becomes difficult to deform or break, and as a result, the durability of the door can be made high. It has become.

  According to the present invention, high durability can be ensured even with a door having a projecting portion on the front.

It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic layout view of the inside of a case of the gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a rear screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing the operation state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine in the state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a perspective view when a display unit is mounted to a cabinet. 41 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view taken along the line Z-Z in FIG. 40, omitting the functional components housed in the housing of the display unit, arranged above the gaming machine when the gaming machine is installed in the island facility The figure also shows the fixed plate member of the island facility. It is a perspective view of a projector mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening part for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is a perspective sectional view of a display unit and a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to a reel screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation range of a front screen mechanism, and the operation range of a reel screen mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing the operation state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing an operation process of a right front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a front screen mechanism and a front screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism, a reel screen drive mechanism, and a movable body base. It is a perspective view of a reel screen mechanism and a reel screen drive mechanism. It is a perspective view for explaining a sensor mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing a detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing a detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing a detection state of a sensor mechanism. It is a sequence diagram concerning operation of a front screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining the control sequence of the drive motor of a front screen drive mechanism at the time of making a front screen mechanism drive from a front waiting | standby position to a front exposure position. It is a sequence diagram which concerns on operation | movement of a reel screen mechanism. It is a figure explaining the control sequence of the drive motor of a reel screen drive mechanism at the time of making a reel screen mechanism drive from a reel waiting position to a reel exposure position. It is a figure explaining a drive procedure of a front screen mechanism and a reel screen mechanism concerning origin return operation. It is a perspective view of a cabinet and a medal supply port. It is a perspective view of a cabinet, a medal supply port, and a medal supply mechanism. It is a perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a medal supply mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing arrangement of a back wall, a medal supply mouth, a medal supply mechanism, and a scaler device. It is a front view of a game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is sectional drawing of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a front view, a top view, and a right side view of a coin guard. It is a front view of a game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is explanatory drawing of the state in which the hopper guide mechanism was attached to the bottom plate. It is the top view and front view of a hopper guide mechanism. It is a perspective view of hopper mechanism HP. It is explanatory drawing at the time of attaching a hopper mechanism HP normally. It is explanatory drawing at the time of attaching a hopper mechanism HP normally. It is explanatory drawing at the time of making the hopper mechanism HP mis-enter. It is a detail view of the inside of a cabinet. It is a perspective view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of sheet metal. It is explanatory drawing of sheet metal. It is a front view of the cabinet in the state which opened the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism. It is a side view of the cabinet in a state where the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened. It is a perspective view of the cabinet of the state which opened the lower drum mechanism. It is explanatory drawing of an upper door lock mechanism. It is explanatory drawing of the upper door lock mechanism in a locked state. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine in the state where the lower door mechanism has been removed from the cabinet. It is a perspective view of a game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a detail view of the lower space of a cabinet. It is a side view of the state made to oppose speaker DD25 and a power supply device. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded view of the operation part and locking part of a maximum BET button. It is the figure which looked at the largest BET button fixed to the 2nd pedestal part from the inside of a cabinet. It is a sectional view of the 2nd pedestal part. It is an exploded view of an operation part. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of a game machine in the state where the lower door mechanism was opened. It is a rear perspective view of a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded view of lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS. It is mounting explanatory drawing of the main control board to a reel unit. It is mounting explanatory drawing of the reel unit to a lower door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel device. It is an exploded perspective view of a reel unit. It is a perspective view of a motor attachment plate, a reel index, and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a detection piece and a detection state. It is a perspective view of a motor attachment plate and a sensor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a motor attachment plate and a sensor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a motor attachment plate and a sensor part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the base member with respect to a motor attachment plate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment position of the sensor with respect to a base member. It is a top view of a game machine in the state where the upper door mechanism was opened. It is a perspective view of a game machine in the state where the upper door mechanism was removed from the cabinet. It is explanatory drawing of an upper side hinge mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a disassembled perspective view of a decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of an irradiation light apparatus and a decoration unit. It is a sectional view of a decoration unit. It is a front view which shows the internal structure of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expansion perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is a partial disassembled perspective view of a left panel mechanism. It is sectional drawing of a left panel mechanism. It is an explanatory view showing a light guide structure of a left light guide plate. It is a perspective view of a panel base, a top lens cover, and an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of an upper left panel mechanism. It is a perspective view of a top lens cover and an upper left panel mechanism.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. The gaming machine is a gaming machine that plays using a gaming medium such as a card storing information of gaming value, which is or is given to a player, in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, etc. Below, it demonstrates as what uses a medal.

  In the following description, the side (direction) toward the player from the gaming machine 1 is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the opposite side to the front side is referred to as the rear side (back direction, depth direction) The right side and the left side as viewed from the player are respectively referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1. Moreover, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as the front-rear direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as the left-right direction or the width direction. A direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped case 2. The housing 2 has a cabinet 21 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged at the upper front of the cabinet 21 and a lower door mechanism DD arranged at the lower front of the cabinet 21. ing. The cabinet 21 accommodates a device (for example, a reel (also referred to as a drum) or the like) used for playing a game. As also shown in FIG. 3, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided to be able to close the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet 21. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at its central portion. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit A is provided inside the cabinet 21 on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit A is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 211 in the cabinet 21. The intermediate support plate 211 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 21. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device including an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear by being irradiated with irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) with respect to By projecting an image according to the rendering information generated based on the shape and the like) and the like, it is possible to make a highly sophisticated and powerful rendering.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B has a projector mechanism B2 for emitting irradiation light forward, and a screen disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and obliquely arranged for irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 in the lower rear It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses a projector mechanism B2 and a mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is disposed at the rear in the cabinet 21. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 horizontally disposed. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Moreover, the heat removal mechanism B23 * B24 is provided in the lower surface of base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating the air and a fan for delivering the air, and by blowing out the air backward, the heat generated when generating the irradiation light is forcibly forced to the rear. It is made to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, the vent holes 21a of the cabinet 21 are disposed in the flow direction of the air in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 out of the machine together with the air through the vent holes 21a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As also shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B <b> 31 has a front surface formed in a rectangular plate shape. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrical between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size not overlapping the angle adjustment hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed to partially overlap with the mirror holding portion B313. Thus, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut on both sides in the left-right direction of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center on the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed on the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and the screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 are of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is held. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of a screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Further, since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring abuts against the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface abuts against the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, whereby the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is held by And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector attaching part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head abuts on the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are accommodated in a projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes an upper wall B12 horizontally disposed, a reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall B12, and side walls B13 and B13 symmetrically disposed in the left-right direction of the upper wall B12. And. The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting more forward than the cabinet 21 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed to project forward at the center on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and holds the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 in an adjustable manner in the space formed by the projection. .

  Moreover, side wall part B13 * B13 has the protrusion part B131 protruded in the horizontal direction from the lower end part. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B 131 a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B 1 is mounted on the cabinet 21, and has a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 21. It is done. On the other hand, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 21 when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet 21, and is wider than the width of the space behind It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, in the side wall portions B13 and B13, the width of the second protrusion B131b is wider than the width of the first protrusion B131a. Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet 21.

  A porous plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The porous plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are opened by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum or the like). The plurality of holes B <b> 151 are formed in a substantially uniform manner over the entire surface of the porous plate B <b> 15. The porous plate B15 allows air to flow on the entire surface of the porous plate B15, and enables the flow of air from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat removal mechanism B23 / B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B 151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B 1 can not be visually observed from the outside. The hole B 151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, a hexagon, etc., and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The porous plate B15 is formed to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the porous plate B15 has an upper side B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower side B15c on the rear side. Upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by bending in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper portion B15a of the porous plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the porous plate B15 is arranged to cover the front of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a, and cover from the lower side with the inclined part B15b and the lower side B15c from the middle to the rear of the projector cover B1 There is. As shown in FIG. 10, the front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position located on the upper side, which is a standby attitude for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, an exposure attitude for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture close to and substantially parallel to the inclined part B15b of the porous plate B15 in the standby posture. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space appears below the porous plate B15, and the air present in this space reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of Passing through the holes B 151 makes it possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and to enhance the cooling efficiency.

  The perforated plate B15 is provided to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1 so that, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the line of sight of the player located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if the irradiation light device B is located on the horizontal line of the part and looking up at the irradiation light device B from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is prevented from being visually recognized by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. As a result, the display unit A can handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C as a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As also shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 horizontally disposed, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side on which the player is located and the top side on which the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are each independently formed in a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. It has been As a result, even when the unit of the screen device C can not be made common, it is possible to make the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 common. Moreover, since partial change for each plate member is possible, it is possible to easily change the specification for each model of the gaming machine 1.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central placement portion C11 disposed in the central portion, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left and right direction centering on the central placement portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central placement portion C11 places the stationary screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the stationary screen mechanism D. The right mount portion C12 and the left mount portion C13 respectively position the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6 by fitting the lower ends of the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6 respectively. It is possible to put it.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward, whereby the tip end portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit A is assembled while being mounted on the intermediate support plate 211 of the cabinet 21, the front side C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 211 so that It is possible to perform positioning backwards. Then, the display unit A is screwed to the front of the cabinet 21 through the through hole C141 of the front side C14, thereby performing the installation and installation of the display unit A from the front side of the cabinet 21. It is possible.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are disposed on the side of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated into the cabinet 21, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 21 in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, a worker located on the front side of the cabinet 21 releases the screw fastening of the display unit A to the cabinet 21 and removes the screw. Then, the hand is extended into the cabinet 21 and the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A are gripped with both hands, and the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet 21. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the hand is extended from the one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit A into the screen apparatus C, and the crank gear E21 seen horizontally from the operation opening C21 is rotated. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The lock state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly pivoted to a desired position.

  When the upper door mechanism UD is open, the hand extends from the front of the opening of the cabinet 21 into the space between the side wall 212 of the cabinet 21 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21. The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the lock state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit A out of the cabinet 21.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The motor housing portion C22 houses a drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and the relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface. The relay substrate CK enables a plurality of signal lines in the display unit A to be gathered and wiring to the outside of the display unit A can be performed at one place. The relay substrate CK is disposed on the front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 by being provided on the back of the back plate C4. That is, the relay substrate CK is disposed in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 21 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. Below the relay substrate CK, as shown in FIG. 5, the through holes 2111 of the intermediate support plate 211 supporting the display unit A are disposed, and the signal lines of the relay substrate CK are inserted.

  As a result, the relay board is disposed outside the screen device C, thereby facilitating the wiring operation and making it unnecessary to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The design freedom in the device C is expanded.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed on the lower right side, and is opposed to the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in such a size that the intermediate gear E23 can be manually operated. Thus, when the display unit A is incorporated into the cabinet 21 and then the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is moved manually, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet 21. After that, the hand is extended from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C, and the intermediate gear E23 seen horizontally from the operation opening C41 is rotated, thereby facilitating the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. It can be moved.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so as to be able to switch the irradiation targets. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as the plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D · E1 · F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is provided rotatably between the front exposure position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front and hides the image so that the image by the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed to allow an image of the irradiation light to appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided so as to be rotatable between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, an image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1 by the reel screen mechanism F1 covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front and hiding it. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed to allow an image by the irradiation light to appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set such that the front screen mechanism E1 present at the front standby position does not interfere with the reel screen mechanism F1 present at the reel standby position. That is, the front standby position is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the pivoting distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is made shorter than the pivoting distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 are different so that overlapping of the operation area by rotation is minimized. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the direction of the front standby position. Thereby, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be turned on the condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is in the standby position. Thereby, the interference at the time of rotation of screen mechanism E1 * F1 is prevented.

(Display unit A: screen device C: fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflecting portion D1, a right surface reflecting portion D2, a left surface reflecting portion D3, and a lower surface reflecting portion D4. The reflection surfaces of these reflection portions D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

  The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions, as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a curved or arc-shaped reflective surface reflecting portion whose curvature center point is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

  The front reflecting portion D1 is arranged such that the reflecting surface is opposed to the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed on the front upper portion of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected on the front It is set to The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are disposed symmetrically about the front reflection portion D1. The right surface reflecting portion D2 and the left surface reflecting portion D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left and right direction in the front surface reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easy to face in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that part of the irradiation light can be fronted The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Moreover, also about the lower surface reflection part D4, the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to a reflective surface becomes easy to turn to the front reflection part D1 direction, A part of irradiation light is made in the front reflection part D1 direction while making the image by irradiation light appear. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D described above, the lightness of the reflective surface is set lower than the lightness of each of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the light quantity at which the irradiation light is reflected on the reflection surface is smaller than the light quantity at which the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are reflected. Thereby, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from white blurring due to mixing of light due to diffuse reflection of the reflection portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the lightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection portion D1 in the other reflection portions D2, D3, and D4 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection portion D1.

As the lightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. It is possible to define any color as long as other colors can be expressed as relative values based on white.

  The lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the lightness of the surface. For example, the lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the lightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is The color of the paint applied to the base of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be blackened. For example, as the paint to be applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D, a white coating is used as the paint to be applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is used. What a black pigment is added to a paint applied to a substrate may be used.

  In such a paint, it is possible to change the lightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism by varying the proportions of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment of the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is Both white and black pigments may be included. In addition, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is more than that of the paint applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or 10-20%)) may be increased. In addition, as a coating material apply | coated to the base material of these screen mechanisms, the coating material for conventionally well-known screens can be employ | adopted suitably, and it can adjust according to the type | mold (for example, diffusion type and reflection type) of a screen. .

  The black pigment is not dispersed in the coating applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed, the black pigment is dispersed in the resin serving as the material of the base. The substrate itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the substrate itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, the members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10 It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) placed in the It is desirable that the lightness of those members is lower than the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, for the surrounding wall, if it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen, the lightness is low. The lower the better. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably closer to black.

(Display unit A: screen device C: front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 has a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support E12 having a pattern such as a first design surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 is configured such that the projection surface E11a is formed in a flat shape so that an image having no distortion appears at the time of irradiation of the irradiation light.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of the depth portion and the shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly along both ends in the short direction passing through the central portion.

  Thus, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral portion and the straight stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion It is in the state. As a result, deformation of the front screen support E12 at the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first design surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Furthermore, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, patterns related to the effects of the game are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are integrated by being bonded with an adhesive after being separately formed. As a result, in the front screen mechanism E1, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern etc. on the front screen support base E12, this sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of distortion due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a in the front screen member E11.

  In addition, as a fixing method of the front screen member E11 and the front screen support stand E12, not only adhesion | attachment with an adhesive agent but arbitrary methods, such as screw fastening, are employable.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the material of the front screen support E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin etc.) which may cause shrinkage when injection molding is suitably employed it can.

(Display unit A: screen device C: front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is made rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B has a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end portion (one end portion) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported at the intermediate position E22a by the right movable base C5 of FIG. Thus, the crank member E22 is capable of rotating the upper end and the lower end (the other end) around the intermediate position E22a.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. As shown in FIG. 25, when the crank member E22 is viewed from the side, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing the middle position E22a and the middle point on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture It is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing the middle position E22a and the middle point on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set such that the lower side is inclined frontward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and in the slide groove E22b, the plane corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. The slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide at the time of movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the above-mentioned curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the slide groove E22b is in an open state so as to expose a part of the slide member E26.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 shown in FIG. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is a line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22 and the slide member It is set so as to have an orthogonal relationship with a line segment connecting the center point of E26.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, the rotation center position in the application direction of all the components of the force even if the force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure with a zero degree of freedom 3-joint link is formed, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as a free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move by the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 acting as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is engaged with the above-mentioned crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is engaged with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposure posture, a line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b corresponds to the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. The tangent line direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because it is set to have a relation orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26. Thereby, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, there is a groove wall surface acting as a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26 when rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21. As a result, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

  When the rotational drive force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so the crank member E22 The intermediate position E22a and the rotational center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a two-joint link of one degree of freedom is formed with the slide member E26 as a free end movable along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b engaged with the slide member E26 rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum to rotate the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby attitude or the exposure attitude, and the acceleration is gradually increased, and the intermediate attitude between the standby attitude and the exposure attitude (FIG. 27) After reaching the maximum speed at, the motor gradually decelerates and enters the stop state 0 when the exposure attitude and the standby attitude are reached. This makes it possible to start and stop the rotation in a state (inertial moment) in which the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (inertial moment), which makes it possible to reduce the torque required for the crank gear E21. It is possible to reduce damage and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3 so that the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. And a right reel screen support F13 connected to the right end of

  The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape approximate to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface which is the rotation center side. The pattern on the back side is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, on the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed in the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface. The projection surface is capable of appearing an image by irradiation of the irradiation light when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position.

  One end portions of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other end portions of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 respectively have projecting portions not shown. The projecting portions are horizontally projected to the outside of the respective reel screen supports F12 and F13, and are connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to be the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
The gaming machine is a so-called pachislot machine. The gaming machine is a gaming machine that plays using a gaming medium such as a card storing information of gaming value, which is or is given to a player, in addition to coins, medals, gaming balls or tokens, etc. Below, it demonstrates as what uses a medal.

  In the following description, the side (direction) toward the player from the gaming machine 1 is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the gaming machine 1, and the opposite side to the front side is referred to as the rear side (back direction, depth direction) The right side and the left side as viewed from the player are respectively referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction) of the gaming machine 1. Moreover, the direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as the front-rear direction or the thickness direction, and the direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as the left-right direction or the width direction. A direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the appearance of the gaming machine 1 is constituted by a rectangular box-shaped case 2. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD arranged at the upper front of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD arranged at the lower front of the cabinet G have.

  Further, in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G, two openings G41 penetrating in the vertical direction are formed at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the upper surface wall G4 so as to close each of the two openings G41.

  As also shown in FIG. 31, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided to be able to close the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet G. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 at its central portion. The upper display window UD1 is provided with a transparent panel UD11 that transmits light.

  As shown in FIG. 32, the inside of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate which divides the inside of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. The upper space is a space behind the upper door mechanism UD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and accommodates the reel unit RU, the main control board MS which controls the operation of the entire gaming machine 1, and the like.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 33, the display unit A is exchangeably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device including an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image, and a screen device C that causes an image to appear by being irradiated with irradiation light from the irradiation light device B. .

  Here, the projection mapping apparatus is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, the position (projection distance or angle) with respect to By projecting an image according to the rendering information generated based on the shape and the like) and the like, it is possible to make a highly sophisticated and powerful rendering.

  The display unit A has a housing A1 having an opening at the front. The housing A1 is configured of a projector cover B1 of the irradiation light device B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. Although the details will be described later, the screen housing C10 has a box-like shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. And projector cover B1 is exchangeably attached to the upper surface of screen case C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B)
As shown in FIG. 34, the irradiation light device B has a projector mechanism B2 for emitting irradiation light forward, and a screen disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 and obliquely arranged for irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 in the lower back It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses a projector mechanism B2 and a mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is disposed at the rear in the cabinet G. The projector mechanism B2 has a flat base member B22 horizontally disposed. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is disposed so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

  Moreover, the heat removal mechanism B23 * B24 is provided in the lower surface of base member B22. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 are disposed on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating the air and a fan for delivering the air, and by blowing out the air backward, the heat generated when generating the irradiation light is forcibly forced to the rear. It is made to flow. As shown in FIG. 30, the vent hole G3a of the cabinet G is disposed in the flow direction of air in the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat removal mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 out of the machine together with the air via the vent holes G3a.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 34, a mirror mechanism B3 is disposed in front of the projector mechanism B2 (emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 35, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 accommodated in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As also shown in FIG. 36, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a plate shape having a rectangular front surface. At each corner portion of the mirror holder B31, an angle adjustment hole B311 is formed, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjustment hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrical between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

  On the other hand, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size not overlapping the angle adjustment hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are respectively provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged to correspond to the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

  The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed to partially overlap with the mirror holding portion B313. Thus, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 abut on both sides in the left-right direction of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holding portion B313, and screwed to the mirror holder B31 by the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner side surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center on the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is disposed so as to be exposed on the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjustment hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

  A screw (not shown) is inserted from the front side into the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11, and the screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31 are of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341.

  When the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 increases. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

  As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is interposed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is held. Thus, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of a screw. Thus, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Further, since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, B341. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

  Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring abuts against the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface abuts against the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11, whereby the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31 It is held by And the screw penetrated from angle adjustment hole B111 of reflector attaching part B11 has penetrated the spring concerned. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases with the rotation of the screw, the screw head abuts on the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 by the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from jumping out of the angle adjustment hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 38, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are accommodated in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has an inclined surface B2a1 at its front portion, which is inclined upward from the rear to the front. As shown in FIG. 39, the projector cover B1 is disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall B12 horizontally disposed, the reflector holding portion B11 disposed on the front side of the upper wall B12, and the upper wall B12. Side walls B13 and B13. The upper wall portion B12 has a front portion projecting more forward than the cabinet G (see FIG. 33). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the center of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to project forward, and the above-described mirror mechanism B3 is held in an adjustable manner in a space portion formed by the projection. There is.

  Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have projecting portions B131 which are horizontally and horizontally projected from the lower end portions. The protrusion B131 has a first protrusion B131a on the front side and a second protrusion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet G when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction of the tips of the first protrusions B131a protruding from the side walls B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the opening of the cabinet G. On the other hand, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the cabinet G, the second protrusion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet G. The distance in the left-right direction of the tips of the second protrusions B131b protruding from the side walls B13 and B13 is set to be slightly shorter than the width in the left-right direction of the space behind the cabinet G. That is, the side wall portions B13 and B13 are formed such that the distance in the left-right direction between the ends of the second protrusion B131b is larger than the distance in the left-right direction between the ends of the first protrusion B131a. Thus, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space of the cabinet G.

  Further, a screw hole B131C penetrating in the vertical direction is formed at the tip end of the second protrusion B131b. When the projector cover B1 is fixed to the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 (see FIG. 33), screws are screwed into the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 through the screw holes B131C. Further, by projecting the protrusion B131 in the horizontal direction from the lower ends of the side walls B13 and B13, the protrusion B131 and the side wall B13 are recessed from the front end of the both ends of the projector cover B1. B 132 is formed continuously toward the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 40, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, a space BS is defined by the recess B 132 and the cabinet G. Further, the top wall B12 and the side wall B13 of the projector cover B1 are formed in such a manner that the distance between the lower end of each side wall B13 and the tip of the second projection B131b protruding from the lower end is The front portion is larger than the rear portion of the two projecting portions B 131 b (see FIG. 39). As a result, the front space of the space BS becomes a larger space than the rear space. Further, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, at least a part of the opening G41 formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G and the space in front of the space BS overlap in top view. The space BS is used as a work space for installing and fixing the gaming machine 1 on the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the gaming machine is installed and fixed to the island facility, the fixed plate member OC of the island facility is disposed above the top wall G4 of the cabinet G. The space BS is a space in which a nail from the plate member G42 attached to the upper surface wall G4 to the fixing plate member OC of the island facility can be driven from the inside of the cabinet G.

  As described above, even when the display unit A is housed in the cabinet G with almost no gap between the upper wall B12 of the projector cover B1 and the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, the display unit A And a cabinet G, a space BS for securing and installing the island facility is secured. As a result, the operator can perform nailing work using the space BS from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened, and as a result, the display unit A may be damaged. In the state where the display unit A is accommodated in the cabinet G, it is possible to nail the gaming machine 1 to the fixed plate member OC of the island facility while preventing the display unit A.

  In addition, since the nails for nailing the gaming machine 1 and the fixed plate member OC are not driven to the metal cabinet G, but to the wooden board member G42 softer than the cabinet, the gaming machine 1 is easily Can be installed on island facilities.

  As a modification, the material of the plate member G42 is not limited to wood, and various materials can be adopted as long as it is a soft member softer than the cabinet G. Moreover, the fixing method to the island installation of the game machine 1 is not limited to nailing, and various fixing methods such as screwing can be adopted.

(Display unit A: irradiation light device B: perforated plate B15)
As shown in FIG. 42, a porous plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The porous plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are opened by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum or the like). The plurality of holes B <b> 151 are formed in a substantially uniform manner over the entire surface of the porous plate B <b> 15. The porous plate B15 allows air to flow on the entire surface of the porous plate B15, and enables the flow of air from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat removal mechanism B23 / B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and the number of the holes B 151 are set such that the inside of the projector cover B 1 can not be visually observed from the outside. The hole B 151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, a hexagon, etc., and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

  The porous plate B15 is formed to cover the first protrusion B131a and the second protrusion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. The porous plate B15 has an upper side B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower side B15c on the rear side. Upper part B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by bending in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

  The upper portion B15a of the porous plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. Thereby, the porous plate B15 is arranged to cover the front of the projector cover B1 from the lower side with the upper part B15a, and cover from the lower side with the inclined part B15b and the lower side B15c from the middle to the rear of the projector cover B1 There is. The inclined portion B15b is disposed to surround the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 in top view. And as shown in FIG. 38, the inclination angle (inclination angle with respect to a horizontal surface) of inclination part B15b is made substantially the same as the inclination angle of inclination surface B2a1. The front screen mechanism E1 of the screen device C is disposed below the perforated plate B15.

  Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position located on the upper side, which is a standby attitude for inhibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, an exposure attitude for permitting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is in an inclined posture close to and substantially parallel to the inclined part B15b of the porous plate B15 in the standby posture. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space appears below the porous plate B15, and the air present in this space reaches the porous plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of Passing through the holes B 151 makes it possible to facilitate the flow of air into the screen device C and to enhance the cooling efficiency.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 43, for example, the perforated plate B15 is provided to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, so that the player's line of sight located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if the irradiation light device B is located on the horizontal line of the part and looking up at the irradiation light device B from the position of the line of sight, the inside of the irradiation light device B is prevented from being visually recognized by the perforated plate B15.

(Display unit A: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 44, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screw fastening. For example, as described above, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C through the screw holes B131C formed in the projecting portion B131 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the display unit A can handle the irradiation light device B and the screen device C as a unit and handle them integrally.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for causing an image to appear by irradiation of irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so as to be able to switch the irradiation targets. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have shapes different from one another in order to diversify the image expression. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens, and are driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2, respectively. In the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the front screen mechanism E1 is larger and heavier. Therefore, when driving the front screen mechanism E1, a larger driving force is required than when driving the reel screen mechanism F1. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D · E1 · F1 and each screen drive mechanism E2 · F2 will be described later.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10)
As described above, the screen device C includes the box-shaped screen housing C10. As also shown in FIG. 45, the screen housing C10 includes a bottom plate C1 horizontally disposed, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screw fastening, so that the front side on which the player is located and the top side on which the irradiation light device B is located. An open box-shaped screen casing C10 is formed.

  The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3 and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are separately molded into predetermined shapes, and predetermined functional components such as the fixed screen mechanism D can be positioned and arranged. It has been As a result, even when the unit of the screen device C can not be made common, it is possible to make the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 common. Further, since partial replacement for each plate member is possible, it is possible to easily change the specifications for each model of the gaming machine 1. The functional components positioned and arranged with respect to each plate member will be described in detail later.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: bottom plate C1)
The bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central placement portion C11 disposed in the central portion, and a right placement portion C12 and a left placement portion C13 disposed in the left and right direction centering on the central placement portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central placement portion C11 places the stationary screen mechanism D in a positionable manner by fitting the lower end portion of the stationary screen mechanism D. The right mount portion C12 mounts the right movable base C5 so as to be positionable by fitting the lower end portion of the right movable base C5. The left mount portion C13 mounts the left movable body base C6 so as to be positionable by fitting the lower end portion of the left movable body base C6. A pattern is three-dimensionally formed on the inner side surface in the left-right direction of each of the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6. That is, the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6 also function as a decoration member. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6 can be positioned and arranged on the bottom plate C1.

  Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward, whereby the tip end portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side C14. When the display unit A is assembled while being mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 33) of the cabinet G, the front side C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate G1 to the rear in the cabinet G It is possible to perform the positioning of the The display unit A is screwed to the front of the cabinet G through the through hole C141 of the front side C14 to perform the installation and installation of the display unit A from the front side of the cabinet G. It is possible.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: right side plate C2, left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit A can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are disposed on the side of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape whose longitudinal direction coincides with the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operation openings C21 and C31 are set to such an extent that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit A is incorporated into the cabinet G, first, the display unit A is taken out from the front side of the cabinet G in which the upper door mechanism UD is opened. . Specifically, a worker located on the front side of the cabinet G releases the screw fastening of the display unit A to the cabinet G and removes the screw. Then, the hand is extended into the cabinet G, the operation openings C21 and C31 of the display unit A are gripped with both hands, and the display unit A is taken out of the cabinet G. After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the hand is extended from the one operation opening C21 of the removed display unit A into the screen apparatus C, and the crank gear E21 seen horizontally from the operation opening C21 is rotated. Thus, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The lock state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by the movement from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly pivoted to a desired position.

  In the open state of the upper door mechanism UD, the hand extends from the front of the opening of the cabinet G into the space between the side wall G2 of the cabinet G and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and the operation opening C21 The crank gear E21 can be rotated by operating the crank gear E21. In this case, the front screen mechanism E1 can be released from the locked state without removing the display unit A out of the cabinet G.

  Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed in the right side plate C2. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned and arranged by the motor housing portion C22. A first support C23 rotatably supporting the gear axis E21a of the crank gear E21 in the front screen drive mechanism E2 and an intermediate gear E23 in the front screen drive mechanism E2 are provided on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 respectively. A second support portion C24 rotatably supporting a shaft member E3 which is a gear shaft of the second embodiment is formed. As described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are positioned and arranged by the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The right front screen drive mechanism E2B of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the reel screen drive mechanism F2 are disposed between the right movable body base C5 and the right side plate C2 in the left-right direction. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A is disposed between the left movable base C6 and the left side plate C3 in the left-right direction.

(Display unit A: screen device C: screen housing C10: back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 48, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a concave portion CO for positioning and arranging the relay substrate CK is formed in the lower portion of the back surface thereof. The relay board CK is a relay for relaying wiring (not shown) between various functional parts (for example, the projector mechanism B2 etc.) in the display unit A and various functional parts (main control board MS etc.) other than the display unit A. It is a substrate.

  An operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is disposed on the lower right side, and is opposed to the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in such a size that the intermediate gear E23 can be manually operated. Thus, when the display unit A is incorporated into the cabinet G, the display unit A is first removed from the cabinet G when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is moved manually. After that, the hand is extended from the operation opening C41 into the screen device C, and the intermediate gear E23 seen horizontally from the operation opening C41 is rotated, thereby facilitating the locked front screen mechanism E1 from the standby position. It can be moved.

  Further, the back plate C4 is disposed in front of the rear end of each of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 49, when the display unit A is placed on the intermediate support plate G1 of the cabinet G, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, the left side plate C3 and The back plate C4 defines the space GS. That is, a gap is secured between the back wall G3 and the back plate C4. Thus, even if the relay substrate CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4, the space GS can prevent the relay substrate CK from interfering with the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  Further, a through hole G11 is formed at a position facing the space GS in the intermediate support plate G1. The through hole G11 is formed such that its opening surrounds the relay substrate CK in top view. The relay board CK is disposed so that the connector CK1 to which the wiring from the device (main control board MS or the like) accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is connected to the through hole G11. Thereby, the electrical connection between the relay substrate CK of the display unit A and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G is made by inserting the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space into the through hole G11 It becomes possible to do by connecting to CK1.

  Thus, by arranging the relay substrate CK outside the screen device C, the wiring operation is facilitated, and it becomes unnecessary to secure the installation space for the relay substrate CK in the screen device C, The design freedom in the screen device C is expanded. In addition, it becomes easy to discharge the heat generated from the relay substrate CK to the outside of the machine through the vent holes G3a formed in the back wall G3 of the cabinet G.

  Also, the wiring connecting the relay substrate CK disposed in the upper space of the cabinet G and the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G passes through the through hole G11 formed in the rear portion of the intermediate support plate G1. As a result, it becomes easy to arrange the wiring behind various devices in the cabinet G. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in wiring management.

  In addition, since the relay board CK is disposed at the rear part in the cabinet G, it is difficult for light to reach the relay board CK, and as a result, it is difficult to connect the wiring to the connector CK1 of the relay board CK. It may be Therefore, in order to facilitate connection of the wiring from the device accommodated in the lower space of the cabinet G to the relay board CK, the connector CK1 of the relay board CK passes through the through hole G11 and is lower than the intermediate support plate G1. It may be configured to protrude into the In addition, the color of the connector CK1 may be a color with high light reflectance (for example, white).

  As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the right movable body base C5, and the left movable body base C6 are positioned on the bottom plate C1. The drive motor F24 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2 is positioned on the right side plate C2, and the gear axis E21a of the front screen drive mechanism E2 and the shaft member E3 are positioned on the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3. The relay substrate CK is positioned relative to the back plate C4. As described above, the fixed screen mechanism D, the drive mechanisms F2 and E2, and the relay substrate CK are respectively positioned and arranged on one of the bottom plate C1, the side plates C2 and C3, and the back plate C4, and are different from each other It is positioned on the board. Therefore, in the entire display unit A, even in the case where standardization among the models can not be achieved, standardization can be achieved among the models in the board unit. As a result, the display unit can be manufactured inexpensively as compared with the case of manufacturing the display unit for each model.

  Moreover, since each board C1-C4 of screen housing | casing C10 is connected by screw fastening, connection of each board C1-C4 can be cancelled | released by loosening a screw. That is, the screen housing C10 is assembled such that the plates C1 to C4 can be exchanged. As a result, it becomes possible to replace the functional parts of the display unit in units of boards, so it is possible to change the specifications of the display unit A while reusing the functional parts other than the replacement target of the display unit A. .

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the right movable base C5 is disposed to the left of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B and the reel screen drive mechanism F2. In addition, the left movable base C6 is disposed to the right of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A. As a result, it is possible to make the drive mechanisms E2 and F2 difficult to see from the player by the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6 which are decoration members. As a result, the aesthetics of the gaming machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the bottom plate C1 is formed with a recess for disposing the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, it becomes possible to easily position and arrange these on the bottom plate C1.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Screen position relation)
As shown in FIG. 50, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 51, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposure position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set such that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front and hides the image so that the image by the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed to allow an image of the irradiation light to appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is provided rotatably between a reel exposure position and a reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposure position and the fixed exposure position is set such that the reel exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposure position, an image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1 by the reel screen mechanism F1 covering the fixed screen mechanism D from the front and hiding it. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed to allow an image by the irradiation light to appear on the fixed screen mechanism D. That is, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2. On the other hand, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D becomes a projection target of the projector mechanism B2.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the axial direction of the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the axial direction of the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 coincide with the left-right direction. The operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 due to the rotation partially overlap each other. Therefore, when one screen of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed in the overlapping range where the operation range overlaps, when the other screen is rotated, the screen comes into contact.

  The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set such that the front screen mechanism E1 present at the front standby position does not interfere with the reel screen mechanism F1 present at the reel standby position. That is, the front standby position is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is disposed behind the fixed screen mechanism D. Thereby, the pivoting distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is made shorter than the pivoting distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The front standby position is disposed outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel standby position is disposed outside the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front standby position and the reel standby position is disposed in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range.

  On the other hand, the front exposure position is disposed within the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel exposure position is disposed within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. That is, each of the front exposure position and the reel exposure position is disposed in the overlapping range in the operation range. Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, the reel screen mechanism F1 can not be disposed at the reel exposure position. Further, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position, the front screen mechanism E1 can not be disposed at the front exposure position.

  The rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that overlapping of the operation ranges by rotation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is minimized. It is different. Specifically, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the direction of the front standby position. In detail, the rotation center axis FG is disposed above the center position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. As a result, the distance between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG can be shortened, so that the operation range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced. By thus reducing the operation range, it is possible to increase the size of the front screen mechanism E1 even in a limited space in the display unit A. The pivoting center axis FG and the pivoting center axis RG are both disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be turned on the condition that one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is in the standby position. Thereby, the interference at the time of rotation of screen mechanism E1 * F1 is prevented. Details of operations of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described later.

(Display unit A: screen device C: fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the fixed screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screw fastening. The fixed screen mechanism D has a front reflecting portion D1, a right surface reflecting portion D2, a left surface reflecting portion D3, and a lower surface reflecting portion D4. The reflection surfaces of these reflection portions D1 to D4 are projection surfaces on which the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is projected, and are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B There is.

  The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions, as long as it has a reflecting surface at a plurality of different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a curved or arc-shaped reflective surface reflecting portion whose curvature center point is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

  The front reflecting portion D1 is arranged such that the reflecting surface is opposed to the player on the front side, and most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B disposed on the front upper portion of the fixed screen mechanism D is reflected on the front It is set to The right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 are joined to the right side portion and the left side portion of the front reflection portion D1, and are disposed symmetrically about the front reflection portion D1. The right surface reflecting portion D2 and the left surface reflecting portion D3 are arranged such that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left and right direction in the front surface reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right surface reflection portion D2 and the left surface reflection portion D3 make the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface easy to face in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that part of the irradiation light can be fronted The light is reflected in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Moreover, also about the lower surface reflection part D4, the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to a reflective surface becomes easy to turn to the front reflection part D1 direction, A part of irradiation light is made in the front reflection part D1 direction while making the image by irradiation light appear. It is designed to reflect.

  In the fixed screen mechanism D described above, the lightness of the reflective surface is set lower than the lightness of each of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the light quantity at which the irradiation light is reflected on the reflection surface is smaller than the light quantity at which the reflection surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are reflected. Thereby, the fixed screen mechanism D is prevented from white blurring due to mixing of light due to diffuse reflection of the reflection portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the lightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the lightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light to the front reflection portion D1 in the other reflection portions D2, D3, and D4 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce white blur while making the image appear strongly in the front reflection portion D1.

As the lightness, Brightness in the L ^* a ^* b ^* color system (L ^* a ^* b ^* color space) or L ^* u ^* v ^* color system (L ^* u ^* v ^* color space) is adopted. It is possible to define any color as long as other colors can be expressed as relative values based on white.

  The lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the lightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are the same as the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the lightness of the surface. For example, the lightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value lower by about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) than the lightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

  In order to make the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the lightness of the reflective surfaces of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is The color of the paint applied to the base of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be blackened. For example, as the paint to be applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D, a white coating is used as the paint to be applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is used. What a black pigment is added to a paint applied to a substrate may be used.

  In such a paint, it is possible to change the lightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism by varying the proportions of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 includes only the white pigment of the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is Both white and black pigments may be included. In addition, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D is more than that of the paint applied to the base of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 (for example, 5 to 25% (or 10-20%)) may be increased. In addition, as a coating material apply | coated to the base material of these screen mechanisms, the coating material for conventionally well-known screens can be employ | adopted suitably, and it can adjust according to the type | mold (for example, diffusion type and reflection type) of a screen. .

  The black pigment is not dispersed in the coating applied to the base of the fixed screen mechanism D, but before the base of the fixed screen mechanism D is formed, the black pigment is dispersed in the resin serving as the material of the base. The substrate itself may be colored to lower the brightness of the substrate itself.

  Further, from the viewpoint of preventing irregular reflection of light, the members constituting the screen casing C10 such as the surrounding walls (the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4) and the inside of the screen casing C10 It is desirable to lower the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) placed in the It is desirable that the lightness of those members is lower than the lightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, for the surrounding wall, if it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen, the lightness is low. The lower the better. That is, the color of the surrounding wall is preferably closer to black.

(Display unit A: screen device C: front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 54, the front screen mechanism E1 has a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface, and a front screen support E12 having a pattern such as a first design surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin flat panel. Thus, the projection screen E11a of the front screen member E11 is formed flat.

  On the other hand, the front screen support E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of the depth portion and the shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral portion of the front screen support E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly along both ends in the short direction passing through the central portion.

  Thus, the front screen member E11 accommodated in the holding recess E121 is abutted and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral portion and the straight stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion It is in the state. As a result, deformation of the front screen support E12 at the deep portion is prevented from deforming the front screen member E11 and causing distortion on the projection surface E11a.

  Further, the front screen support E12 has a first design surface E12a in a partial area around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposure position. Furthermore, the front screen support E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and the second pattern surface E12b, for example, patterns related to the effects of the game are three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

  The front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 configured as described above are integrated by being bonded with an adhesive after being separately formed. As a result, in the front screen mechanism E1, even if sink marks may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when forming a pattern etc. on the front screen support base E12, this sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of distortion due to sink marks on the projection surface E11a in the front screen member E11.

  In addition, as a fixing method of the front screen member E11 and the front screen support stand E12, not only adhesion | attachment with an adhesive agent but arbitrary methods, such as screw fastening, are employable.

  The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As a material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the material of the front screen support E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, an ABS resin etc.) which may cause shrinkage when injection molding is suitably employed it can.

(Display unit A: screen device C: front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is made rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1, and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. And a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position (in the standby posture), the front screen mechanism E1 is inclined upward from the rear end to the front end. So is configured. The inclination of the front screen mechanism E1 is substantially parallel to the inclined portion B15b of the porous plate B15 and the inclined surface B2a1 of the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2.

  As described above, the attitude of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed in the front standby position is parallel to the horizontal plane, by setting the inclination attitude so as to ascend from the rear end to the front end. It can suppress that the irradiation light irradiated by the irradiation light apparatus B is prevented by the front screen mechanism E1 compared with the case where it is set as an attitude | position. Thereby, the vertical direction position of the front screen mechanism E1 when arranged at the front standby position can be made closer to the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be enlarged even in the limited space of the display unit A. In addition, as described above, since the lower surface B2a of the projector mechanism B2 has the inclined surface B2a1, the vertical position of the front screen mechanism E1 when placed in the front standby position is the position relative to the projector mechanism B2. It can be approached. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be further enlarged.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The position where the upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is the top when it is disposed at the front exposure position (when exposed) on the back of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. Is linked to

  As shown in FIG. 57, the crank member E22 is pivotally supported by the right movable base C5 (see FIG. 45) at an intermediate position E22a. Thus, the crank member E22 is capable of pivoting the upper end and the lower end (the other end) with the intermediate position E22a as the pivot center. The intermediate position E22a coincides with the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1.

  As described above, the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed above the central position of the front screen mechanism E1 disposed at the front exposure position. Further, the upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 is connected to the upper position when it is disposed at the front exposure position (in the exposure posture) on the rear surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. . With the above configuration, the operation range between the front standby position and the front exposure position in the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced, so that the front screen mechanism E1 can be made larger.

  The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 57, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing the middle position E22a and the middle point at the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture It is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing the middle position E22a and the middle point on the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set such that the lower side is inclined frontward than the upper side in the standby posture.

  A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed such that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and in the slide groove E22b, the plane corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 is set parallel to the center line of the lower region. The slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (the distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide at the time of movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set such that the slide member E26 abuts on the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the above-mentioned curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position. On the other hand, the lower end portion of the slide groove E22b is in an open state so as to expose a part of the slide member E26.

  The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The gear axis E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the first support portion C23 of the right side plate C2 as shown in FIG. The gear axis E21a of the crank gear E21 has a line connecting the gear axis E21a and the eccentric position E21b at the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the slide member E26 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position. It is set so as to have an orthogonal relationship with a line segment connecting the center point.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the gear axis E21a in the application direction of all the components of this force. Exists and acts as a fixed end, so the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure with a zero degree of freedom 3-joint link with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the gear axis E21a of the crank gear E21 as a fixed end and the slide member E26 as a free end is formed. Even when E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move by the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 acting as a strong brake.

  An intermediate gear E23 is engaged with the above-mentioned crank gear E21. The intermediate gear E23 is pivotally supported by the right movable base C5 and the second support C24 of the right side plate C2. A motor shaft gear E24 is engaged with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. Thus, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

  Here, all components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning trajectory of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 60, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, a line segment connecting the gear axis E21a and the eccentric position E21b slides with the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. The tangent line direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22 because it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the member E26. Thereby, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby position or the exposure position, there is a groove wall surface acting as a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26 when rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21. As a result, the crank gear E21 easily starts to rotate.

  When the rotational drive force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so the crank member E22 The intermediate position E22a and the gear axis E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and a two-joint link of one degree of freedom is formed with the slide member E26 as a free end movable along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 having the slide groove E22b engaged with the slide member E26 rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum to rotate the upper region of the crank member E22. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposure position.

  The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is the stop state 0 when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby attitude or the exposure attitude, and the acceleration is gradually increased to an intermediate attitude between the standby attitude and the exposure attitude (see FIG. 59). After reaching the maximum speed in (2), the vehicle gradually decelerates, and enters the stop state 0 when the exposure attitude and the standby attitude are reached. This makes it possible to start and stop the rotation in a state (inertial moment) in which the angular acceleration of the crank gear E21 is small (inertial moment), which makes it possible to reduce the torque required for the crank gear E21. It is possible to reduce damage and wear of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25) due to overload.

  As shown in FIG. 61, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are disposed symmetrically in the left-right direction.

  The intermediate gear E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the intermediate gear E23 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via the shaft member E3.

  Specifically, the shaft member E3 extends in the left-right direction, and the intermediate gear E23 of each of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is coupled to both ends thereof. In addition, the shaft member E3 is disposed in the rear of the fixed screen mechanism D in a space sandwiched by the back plate C4 and the fixed screen mechanism D (see FIG. 53).

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven, the motor shaft gear E24 is rotated. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the intermediate gears E23 and E23 and the shaft member E3 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B rotate together. Then, the crank gears E21 and E21 are rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the intermediate gears E23 and E23, so that the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated about the rotation center axis FG, and the front standby position It will move between the front exposure position.

  As described above, by connecting the intermediate gears E23 and E23 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B by the shaft member E3, the rotational drive force of the drive motor E25 is transmitted to the two crank members E22. It becomes possible to transmit equally. Therefore, as compared with the case where the intermediate gears E23 and E23 are not connected by the shaft member E3, concentration of the driving load on one of the two crank members E22 can be prevented. Further, since the drive motor E25 is provided in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B disposed on the right side of the fixed screen mechanism D, the arrangement of the fixed screen mechanism D is not hindered.

  In addition, the shaft member E3 is not used as a pivot of the front screen mechanism E1. For this reason, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the shaft member E3 increases, and it becomes possible to arrange | position so that the shaft member E3 may not obstruct arrangement | positioning of another part such as fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the arrangement of the separate part while maintaining the rotation range and size of the front screen mechanism E1 to a desired degree.

  Further, since the shaft member E3 is disposed rearward of the fixed screen mechanism D, the light projected onto the fixed screen mechanism D is not blocked by the shaft member E3. Further, since the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed in front of the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D, compared with the case where the rotation center axis FG of the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed behind the rear end position of the fixed screen mechanism D. Thus, the length (the length of the crank member E22) between the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis FG can be shortened. Therefore, even when the space in the cabinet G is limited and the display unit A can not be enlarged, the size of the front screen mechanism E1 can be maintained at a desired level.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIG. 52, the reel screen mechanism F1 is formed of a flat plate having a curved shape. The reel screen mechanism F1 has an arc shape in a side view, which is curved in a shape approximate to the rotation direction. On the surface of the reel screen mechanism F1, a pattern is formed on the peripheral edge portion, and an inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is a projection surface F1a. The projection surface F1a is an arc surface that is convex on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of light from the projector mechanism B2 when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel exposure position. Further, a pattern is formed on the back surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 which is on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back side is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position.

  The reel screen mechanism F1 is made rotatable between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position by the driving force of the reel screen drive mechanism F2. Then, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, the projection surface F1a can appear an image by the irradiation of the irradiation light.

(Display unit A: screen device C: reel screen drive mechanism F2)
As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the reel screen drive mechanism F2 includes two arm members F21 and F21, an arc gear F22, a motor shaft gear F23, and a drive motor F24. One end of each of the two arm members F21 and F21 is connected to the rear surface of the right end portion and the rear surface of the left end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1. Further, support shafts F21a and F21a that protrude outward in the left-right direction are formed on the outer side surfaces of the other end portions of the two arm members F21 and F21. The support shafts F21a and F21a are rotatably supported by the right movable base C5 and the left movable base C6, respectively. As a result, the two arm members F21 can rotate around the support shafts F21a and F21a. The support shafts F21a and F21a coincide with the rotation center axis RG of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The arcuate gear F22 is fixed to the tip of the support shaft F21a disposed on the right side of the two support shafts F21a and F21a. A motor shaft gear F23 is engaged with the arc-shaped gear F22. The drive shaft of the drive motor F24 is connected to the motor shaft gear F23. The drive motor F24 is a stepping motor, is electrically connected to the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) via the relay board CK, and is driven by the control of the main control board MS.

  In the above configuration, when the drive motor E25 is driven under the control of the main control board MS, the motor shaft gear E24 rotates. With the rotation of the motor shaft gear E24, the arcuate gear F22 rotates. Then, the arm member F21 is rotated in conjunction with the rotation of the arc gear F22, whereby the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotated about the rotation center axis RG, and the reel standby position and the reel exposure position And will work between.

(Display unit A: Screen device C: Sensor mechanism CS)
As described above, the operation ranges of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 partially overlap each other (see FIG. 53). Also, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven by different drive mechanisms. That is, the driving of the front screen mechanism E1 and the driving of the reel screen mechanism F1 are not linked (synchronized). Therefore, in order to prevent interference (contact) between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, it is necessary to grasp the positions of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control board MS (see FIG. 32) recognizes the position of the front screen mechanism E1 based on the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from the home position, with the front standby position as the home position. ing. Similarly, with the reel standby position as the origin position, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 is grasped based on the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position.

  However, if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is not properly operated, or if the front screen mechanism E1 or the reel screen mechanism F1 is manually moved while the power is off, the main control is performed. The substrate MS can not grasp the exact positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. When the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are operated in such a situation, these may interfere with each other.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, the screen device C includes a sensor mechanism CS for detecting the positions of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. Then, based on the detection result from the sensor mechanism CS, the main control board MS executes a return operation for returning the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 to the home position (standby position).

  A light shielding portion E22d is formed in the upper region and a light shielding portion E22e is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B. A light shielding portion F1b is formed on the back surface of the right end portion of the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The sensor mechanism CS has three sensors CS1 to CS3. These sensors CS1 to CS3 are transmission type optical sensors, and as shown in FIG. 64, are formed in a substantially U shape. One end of the U-shaped open side is a light emitting portion for emitting light, and the other end is a light receiving portion for receiving light. Then, when the light receiving unit receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit, these sensors CS1 to CS3 output a Low signal to the main control substrate MS, and the light emitted from the light emitting unit is blocked and the light receiving unit When light can not be received, a Hi signal is output to the main control substrate MS.

  The sensor CS1 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front standby position. The sensor CS1 is fixedly disposed on the rotation trajectory of the light shielding portion E22d of the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS1 sandwiches the light shielding portion E22d with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby state. When it does not exist in the position (see FIG. 66), the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion are fixedly disposed at a position where the light shielding portion E22d is not sandwiched. Therefore, the sensor CS1 outputs the Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and the Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not in the front standby position.

  The sensor CS2 is a sensor for detecting whether the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposure position. The sensor CS2 is fixedly disposed on the rotation trajectory of the light shielding portion E22e in the crank member E22. Specifically, when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position (see FIG. 66), the sensor CS2 sandwiches the light shielding portion E22e between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position When the light shielding portion E22e is not present between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (see FIG. 65), the light shielding portion E22e is not fixed. Therefore, the sensor CS2 outputs the Hi signal to the main control board MS when the front screen mechanism E1 is at the front exposure position and the Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is not at the front exposure position.

  The sensor CS3 is a sensor for detecting whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position. The sensor CS3 is fixedly disposed on the rotation trajectory of the light shielding portion F1b in the reel screen mechanism F1. Specifically, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position (see FIG. 65), the sensor CS2 holds the light shielding portion F1b between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position When the light shielding portion F1b is not present between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion (see FIG. 67), the light shielding portion F1b is not fixed. Therefore, the sensor CS3 outputs the Hi signal to the main control board MS when the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel standby position and the Low signal when the reel screen mechanism F1 is not at the reel standby position.

  In the above configuration, detection signals from the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 indicate whether the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position, the front exposure position, or an intermediate position which is a position between them. There is. The detection signal from the sensor CS3 indicates whether the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position or at a position other than the reel standby position.

  Further, as described above, since the front standby position and the reel standby position are respectively disposed in the overlapping range in the operation range of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1, when the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposed position, The reel screen mechanism F1 can not be disposed at the reel exposure position. Therefore, when the sensor CS2 detects that the front screen is in the front exposure position, it indicates that the reel screen mechanism F1 is not in the reel exposure position.

(Operation control of front screen mechanism E1)
Next, prior to describing the home position return operation, the operation control of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in a normal state will be described. The main control board MS rotates the front screen mechanism E1 between the front standby position and the front exposure position by controlling the drive motor E25. The pivoting operation of the front screen mechanism E1 is executed under the condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is in the reel standby position.

  As mentioned earlier, the main control board MS sets the front standby position as the origin position, and grasps the position of the front screen mechanism E1 by the number of steps of the drive motor E25 from this origin position. For example, as shown in FIG. 68, when the number of steps is 210, it can be grasped that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal, and when the number of steps is 190-191, detection of the sensor CS2 The signal switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

  Further, the main control board MS controls the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the front screen mechanism E1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and the pulse width of the drive motor E25. Hereinafter, in the drive motor E25, the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the front screen mechanism E1 from the front exposure position to the front standby position is-direction I assume.

  FIG. 69 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor E25 when rotating the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the pulse width of 2.2 ms in the + direction. Drive the number of steps by 210 (procedure 2). Thus, the front screen mechanism E1 pivots from the front standby position to the front exposure position. Thereafter, the drive motor E25 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 3). The above is the control sequence when rotating from the front standby position to the front exposure position. The control sequence for turning the front screen mechanism E1 from the front standby position to the front exposure position is a sequence in which the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to procedure 2 in the control sequence of FIG. do it.

(Operation control of reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, normal operation control of the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The main control board MS rotates the reel screen mechanism F1 between the reel standby position and the reel exposure position by controlling the drive motor F24. The pivoting operation of the reel screen mechanism F1 is performed on the condition that the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the main control board MS sets the reel standby position as an origin position, and grasps the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 by the number of steps of the drive motor F24 from this origin position. For example, when the number of steps is 140, it can be grasped that the reel screen mechanism F1 is at the reel exposure position. In the present embodiment, when the number of steps is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal.

  Further, the main control board MS controls the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 by controlling the motor rotation direction and the pulse width of the drive motor F24. Thereafter, in the drive motor F24, the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is + direction, and the motor rotation direction for moving the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel exposure position to the reel standby position is-direction I assume.

  FIG. 71 shows an example of a control sequence of the drive motor F24 when rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position. In this control sequence, first, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the previous excitation phase (procedure 1), and then the drive motor F24 is 8 ms with a pulse width of 4 ms in the + direction. The number of steps is driven (procedure 2). Thus, the rotation of the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position is started, and the rotation speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is accelerated. Thereafter, the drive motor F24 is driven in 122 steps with a pulse width of 3 ms in the + direction (procedure 3). Thereafter, the drive motor F24 is driven in 122 steps with a pulse width of 5 ms in the + direction (procedure 4). Thereby, the rotational speed of the reel screen mechanism F1 is reduced. Then, the drive motor F24 is excited with a pulse width of 100 ms without updating the phase from the immediately preceding excitation phase (procedure 5). The above is the control sequence when rotating from the reel standby position to the reel exposed position. In the control sequence when rotating the reel screen mechanism F1 from the reel standby position to the reel exposure position, the motor rotation direction of the drive motor E25 according to the procedures 2 to 4 in the control sequence of FIG. It should be a sequence.

  As described above, the main control board MS drives the front screen mechanism E1 on condition that the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the reel standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front standby position. Since the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven under the condition, interference at the time of rotation of the screen mechanisms can be prevented.

(Return to origin of front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1)
Next, the origin return operation of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 will be described. The origin return operation is performed at a predetermined timing such as recovery from the power-off state.

  Here, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches from the Hi signal to the Low signal when the front screen mechanism E1 is driven in the + direction by several steps from the origin position to the drive motor E25 (see FIG. 68). Therefore, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 may not coincide with the origin position. Similarly, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the position of the reel screen mechanism F1 may not coincide with the origin position. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the origin return operation according to the front screen mechanism E1 is performed, and even if the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the reel screen mechanism F1 is used. Such origin return operation is configured to be performed.

  Further, the main control board MS drives the drive motor F24 and the drive motor E25 in the origin return operation, and can execute four basic operations of operations 1 to 4. The operations 1 and 2 relate to the front screen mechanism E1, and the operations 3 and 4 relate to the reel screen mechanism F1.

  The operation 1 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal. In detail, operation 1 is an operation of driving the drive motor E 25 in the positive direction by about 30 to 40 steps. Thus, the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  An operation 2 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS1 is a low signal. In detail, the operation 2 is an operation of driving the drive motor E 25 in the − direction, and driving and stopping 20 steps after the signal output from the sensor CS 1 is switched from the Low signal to the Hi signal. As mentioned earlier, when the front standby position is at the home position and the number of steps of the drive motor E25 is 20-21, the detection signal of the sensor CS1 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 can be reliably returned to the home position.

  An operation 3 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal. In detail, this is an operation of driving the drive motor F24 by about 10 to 20 steps in the + direction. Thus, the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 can be reliably switched from the Hi signal to the Low signal.

  An operation 4 is an operation executed when the detection signal output from the sensor CS3 is a low signal. In detail, the operation 4 is an operation of driving the drive motor F24 in the-direction, and driving the drive motor F24 for one step number and stopping after switching the signal output from the sensor CS3 from the Low signal to the Hi signal. As mentioned earlier, when the reel standby position is at the origin position and the number of steps of the drive motor F24 is 1-2, the detection signal of the sensor CS3 switches between the Hi signal and the Low signal. Therefore, by performing this operation 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the home position.

  As shown in FIG. 72, since the sensor mechanism CS includes three sensors CS1 to CS3, there are eight combinations of detection states of these sensors CS1 to CS3. Here, since the front screen mechanism E1 is not simultaneously arranged at the front standby position and the front exposure position, of the eight types of sensor states, two types in which the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 both output the Hi signal. The sensor states (state 1 and state 2) indicate that an abnormality such as a failure of the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 has occurred. Therefore, when both the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 output the Hi signal, the main control board MS determines that an abnormality has occurred, and notifies the abnormality with audio or video using a speaker, a monitor, or the like.

  In the memory of the main control board MS, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen according to the six types of sensor states (states 3 to 8) except the above two types of sensor states among the eight types of sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS. Six types of drive procedures for mechanism F1 are stored. These six driving procedures are determined so that the screen mechanisms do not interfere with each other as much as possible. Hereinafter, driving procedures according to six types of sensor states will be described.

  When the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 outputs a low signal (state 3), both the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are out of the operation range of the other screen mechanism Is located in Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 3, the main control board MS first performs the operation 1 and the operation 2 to restore the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, by continuing the operations 3 and 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the home position.

  When the sensor CS1 outputs a Hi signal and the sensor CS2 and the sensor CS3 output a low signal (state 4), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and the reel The screen mechanism is disposed at the reel exposure position or at an intermediate position between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. Here, the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1 is the range (non-overlapping range) on the reel standby position side when it is out of the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel exposure position side when it is in the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. It is divided into two ranges with the range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the reel exposure position and the reel standby position. For this reason, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the intermediate position, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be disposed within the overlapping range which is within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the drive procedure according to this state 4, the main control board MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, the operation 1 and the operation 2 are continuously performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position.

  When the sensor CS2 and the sensor CS3 output a Hi signal and the sensor CS1 outputs a Low signal (state 5), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1, and The reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 5, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, by continuing the operations 3 and 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the home position.

  When the sensor CS2 outputs a Hi signal and the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS3 output a low signal (state 6), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the front exposure position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 Is located at an intermediate position. In this state 6, the reel screen mechanism F1 may be disposed within the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1, as in the above-mentioned state 4. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 6, the main control board MS performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. Thereafter, by performing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position.

  When the sensor CS3 outputs a Hi signal and the sensor CS1 and the sensor CS2 output a low signal (state 7), the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at an intermediate position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is It is disposed outside the operating range of the front screen mechanism E1. Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 7, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. Thereafter, by continuing the operations 3 and 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the home position.

  When the sensors CS1 to CS3 are in the sensor state (state 8) in which the Low signal is output, the front screen mechanism E1 is disposed at the middle position, and the reel screen mechanism F1 is disposed at the middle position or the reel exposure position. Here, with regard to the operation range of the front screen mechanism E1, the range on the front standby position side (non-overlapping range) outside the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1 and the front exposure position side within the operation range of the reel screen mechanism F1. Range (overlapping range). The boundary between the overlapping range and the non-overlapping range exists between the front exposure position and the front standby position. Therefore, in state 8, the front screen mechanism E1 may be disposed within the operating range of the reel screen mechanism F1. For this reason, there is a possibility that the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 may be disposed within the range of operation of each other. As a result, when one of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 is driven, the other screen mechanism may move due to interference. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are driven to perform the return operation based on only the detection results of the sensors CS1 to CS3 at the start of the return operation, one of the screen mechanisms is returned to the origin position. It may not be possible.

  Therefore, in the driving procedure according to the state 8, the main control board MS first performs the operation 2 to restore the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. After that, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a high signal or a low signal. Then, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a low signal, by performing the operation 4, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS3 is a Hi signal, the operations 3 and 4 are continuously performed to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position.

  As described above, when the sensor states of the sensor mechanism CS are states 3 to 7, the screen mechanisms interfere with each other by driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 according to the driving procedure according to the respective states. It is possible to return to each home position. In addition, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 8, after the front screen mechanism E1 is returned to the origin position, the reel screen mechanism F1 is returned to the origin position according to the driving procedure according to the detection signal of the sensor CS3. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 can be reliably returned to the home position. As a result, interference between the screen mechanisms can be reliably prevented by appropriately driving the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the processing after the return operation.

  As a modification, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 3, the main control board MS continues the operations 3 and 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position, and then the operation 1 And by continuing the operation 2, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the home position.

  Further, when the sensor state of the sensor mechanism CS is the state 8, the main control board MS first performs the operation 4 to return the reel screen mechanism F1 to the origin position. After that, the main control board MS determines whether the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a high signal or a low signal. Then, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a low signal, the operation 2 is performed to return the front screen mechanism E1 to the origin position. On the other hand, when the detection signal of the sensor CS1 is a Hi signal, the front screen mechanism E1 may be returned to the origin position by continuously performing the operations 1 and 2.

  Further, the sensors CS1 to CS3 can adopt various sensors such as a contact type sensor as well as the transmission type optical sensor. Further, the sensor mechanism CS does not necessarily have to have three sensors CS1 to CS3. It is detected whether the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front standby position, and the front screen mechanism E1 is present at the front exposed position. If it is possible to detect whether or not the reel screen mechanism F1 is present at the reel standby position, it may be configured by one sensor.

(Cabinet G)

(Cabinet G: Medal Supply Mechanism MH)
As shown in FIG. 73A, on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, a replenishment opening G31 for conducting the atmosphere between the inside and the outside of the housing 2 is opened. The replenishment opening G31 is disposed at the center of the back wall G3. When an automatic circulation replenishment device (not shown) is installed on an installation island where the gaming machine 1 is installed, a screw is performed in a state where the medal replenishment port P serving as the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the replenishment opening G31. Stop fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, the medal replenishment port P inserted into the replenishment opening G31 extends to the upper side of the hopper mechanism HP. Thereby, the medal from the automatic circulation replenishment device can be supplied to the hopper mechanism HP.

  As shown in FIG. 73B, a medal replenishment mechanism MH is provided inside the housing 2 at the replenishment opening G31 through which the medal replenishment port P is inserted. The medal replenishment mechanism MH opens and closes the replenishment opening G31. That is, when the medal replenishment port P of the automatic circulation replenishment device is inserted into the replenishment opening G31, the replenishment opening G31 is released by the medal replenishment mechanism MH. Further, when the medal replenishment port P of the automatic circulation replenishment device is not inserted into the replenishment opening G31, the replenishment opening G31 is put in the shielding state by the medal replenishment mechanism MH. Hereinafter, the medal supply mechanism MH will be specifically described.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the medal replenishment mechanism MH includes a shielding member MH1 and a guide member MH2. The shielding member MH1 is slidable in the vertical direction by the guide member MH2, and can switch between a shielding state in which the replenishment opening G31 is shielded and a released state in which the replenishment opening G31 is exposed. .

  The shielding member MH1 has a flat plate portion MH11 and a projecting portion MH12. The flat plate portion MH11 is formed in a rectangular flat plate shape capable of shielding the replenishment opening G31 from the inside of the cabinet G of the housing 2. The flat plate portion MH11 has a screw hole MH13 at the top and a screw hole MH14 at the bottom. Thus, the shielding member MH1 can be screwed and fixed to the back wall G3 in a shielding state in which the replenishment opening G31 is shielded. The projecting portion MH12 is formed to project vertically in the inward direction of the cabinet G from the center of the upper edge of the flat plate portion MH11.

  The guide member MH2 is formed in a rectangular ring along the edge of the shielding member MH1 in a shielding state in which the replenishment opening G31 is shielded. The guide member MH2 is screwed and fixed to the back wall G3 so as to sandwich the shielding member MH1. Specifically, the guide member MH2 has an upper edge MH21, two side edges MH22 and MH22, and a lower edge MH23.

  The upper edge MH21 is formed along the upper edge outside of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state. That is, the upper edge portion MH21 is adjacent to the upper side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and restricts the vertical upward movement of the shielding member MH1. The two side edges MH22 and MH22 have both ends of the upper edge MH21 as one end, and are formed along the side edges of the shielding member MH1 in a shielding state from the one end in the vertically downward direction. That is, the two side edges MH22 and MH22 are adjacent to the side of the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state, and restrict the lateral movement of the shielding member MH1.

  The lower edge portion 23 is formed to connect the other ends of the two side edge portions MH22 and MH22. At the lower edge portion 23, a holding portion MH23a, a guide groove MH23b, and a screw hole MH23c are formed. The holding portion MH23a is a notch formed at the center of the upper surface of the lower edge portion 23, and is formed to have a width larger than the width of the protrusion MH12 of the shielding member MH1. Thus, when the shielding member MH1 in the shielding state is slid in the vertically downward direction, the projecting portion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 is supported by the holding portion MH23a. That is, the shielding member MH1 is held in the open state in which the replenishment opening G31 is exposed. In addition, the holding portion MH23a is formed to be thinner than the protruding length of the protruding portion MH12. Therefore, since the protrusion MH12 of the shielding member MH1 protrudes more than the holding portion MH23a, the protrusion MH12 can be easily grasped, and it is possible to easily shift from the open state to the shield state.

  The guide groove MH23b is a groove engaged with the shielding member MH1 formed on the back wall G3 side, and the shielding member MH1 is slid in the vertical direction. The screw hole MH23c is at a position where it can be screwed and fixed with the screw hole MH14 when in the shielding state, and is formed at a position where it can be screwed and fixed with the screw hole MH13 when it is in the open state.

  As shown in FIG. 76, the medal replenishment port P is inserted obliquely into the replenishment opening G31. A scaler device SK is disposed above such a medal supply port P. The scaler device SK includes a scaler substrate SK1 that processes position information input to the touch sensor panel disposed on the liquid crystal display panel surface, and a scaler substrate case SK2 in which the scaler substrate SK1 is installed. The scaler substrate case SK2 is a support member whose bottom surface is a concave plate formed so as to surround the medal supply port P inclined in an oblique direction. The scaler substrate SK1 is provided obliquely on such a scaler substrate case SK2.

(Hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 77, below the lower space of the cabinet G, a hopper mechanism HP and an overflow bucket OF are disposed.

  The hopper mechanism HP is attached to a central portion of the bottom plate G91 in the cabinet G. The hopper mechanism HP has a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper mechanism HP pays out the medals when the stored medals exceed a predetermined number or when the settlement button is pressed and the medals are settled. The medals paid out by the hopper mechanism HP are discharged from the medal payout outlet DD14.

  The overflow bucket OF stores the medals overflowing from the hopper mechanism HP. The overflow bucket OF is disposed on the right side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The overflow bucket OF is engaged with the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, and is configured to be removable from the bottom plate G91.

(Configuration of hopper mechanism HP)
As shown in FIG. 78, the hopper mechanism HP includes a bucket HP1 for storing a large number of medals, a base member HP2 to which the bucket HP1 is attached, and a dispensing unit (not shown) accommodated inside the base member HP2. There is.

  The payout unit has a function of paying out the medals one at a time with a fixed posture, and has a coin disk that successively pays out while rotating the medals accumulated in the bucket HP1. The base member HP2 has a medal payout outlet DD14. The coin disc of the medal payout unit accumulated in the bucket HP1 is driven to be ejected one by one from the medal payout port DD14.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the bucket HP1 has an upper end opening HP11 formed of a wall surface substantially perpendicular to a horizontal surface, and an inclined side wall HP12 which is inclined at a predetermined angle continuously to the upper end opening HP11. doing. The top end opening HP11 has a substantially rectangular planar shape. At the front corner of the upper end opening HP11, a discharge guide HP13 for guiding the medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 to the outside of the bucket HP1 is provided. The discharge guide HP13 has an inclined surface inclined so as to be lower from the inner side to the outer side of the bucket HP1. The medals guided by the discharge guide HP 13 are stored in the overflow bucket OF.

  The medal led to the selector DD15 and collided with the discharge guide HP13 is bounced to the inclined side wall HP12 of the bucket HP1. At this time, if the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has not reached a certain amount, the medals move in the bucket HP1 along the inclined sidewall HP12. Thereby, the medals can be uniformly stored in the bucket HP1.

  On the other hand, when the amount of medals stored in the bucket HP1 has reached a certain amount, the medals collide and collide with the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP13 and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1 and discharge guide HP13 Return to the slope of the. Then, the medal moves on the inclined surface of the discharge guide HP 13 by its own weight and goes to the overflow bucket OF side.

  Further, on both side surfaces of the hopper mechanism HP, guide pieces HP21 and HP22 which are continuously extended from the bottom surface of the hopper mechanism HP are provided. In addition, on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP, a connector HP41 connected to a connector G81 of a cabinet G described later is provided.

(Configuration of overflow bucket OF)
As shown in FIG. 78, the overflow bucket OF includes a storage case main body OF1 and a medal guide OF2.

  The storage case main body OF1 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose upper surface is opened. The medal guide OF2 is configured to be removable from the storage case main body OF1. The medal guide OF2 guides the medal led from the discharge guide HP13 to the overflow bucket OF to the storage case main body OF1, and prevents the medal from being biased to one side of the storage case main body OF1.

(Coin Guard HP30)
In this gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 79, above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a medal replenishment mechanism MH (corresponding to a refilling port) for discharging medals received from the outside is provided.

  Here, there is a predetermined distance in the height direction between the medal replenishment mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to the hopper device). When medals are replenished to the hopper mechanism HP from the medal replenishment mechanism MH, the medals fall because they have a predetermined distance in the height direction, and collide with the medals stored in the bucket HP1, and the momentum is outward by the momentum It may be pushed out. In this case, many collide with the upper end opening HP11 of the hopper mechanism HP and stay in the bucket HP1. However, in rare cases, the medal may jump over the upper end opening HP11 and jump out of the bucket HP1.

When the medal has jumped out of the bucket HP1, the lower door mechanism DD is opened and collected when the medal falls to the side with the power supply device DE of the bottom plate G91 or the side with the overflow bucket OF. do it. However, when the medal falls between the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, it is necessary to remove the hopper mechanism HP, which takes time and effort.
Furthermore, since the hopper mechanism HP and the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are electrically connected by the connector, when the metallic medal touches the metal portion of the connector, it causes the failure. It will

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the back wall G3 of the cabinet G (corresponding to the back of the case) and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP between the medal supply mechanism MH and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. A coin guard HP30 (corresponding to a medal spill preventing member) is provided so as to bridge from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G to the edge of the bucket HP1 so as to fill the gap HPG (see FIG. 80) therebetween.

  As shown in FIG. 78 and FIG. 81, the coin guard HP30 is provided at the corner on the back side of the upper end opening HP11, and has an L shape in top view. The L-shaped coin guard HP30 is formed of a first guard HP301 facing the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a second guard HP302 facing the overflow bucket OF. Thus, the first guard portion HP301 prevents the medals from falling into the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, and the second guard portion HP302 is an overflow bucket The medals are prevented from falling to the side of the OF (corresponding to the auxiliary storage).

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the first guard portion HP301 and the second guard portion HP302 of the coin guard HP30 are inclined from the back wall G3 side of the cabinet G toward the bucket HP1 side. It has surface HP301a. Further, as shown in FIG. 81, two screw holes HP301c and HP301d to be screwed into the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are formed on the front surface of the coin guard HP30.

  According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medal received from the medal supply mechanism MH is a bucket Even if it is likely to overflow from the HP 1, it can be prevented from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G 3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP 1 of the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the overflowing medals accumulate in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfere with the connector, the electronic device or the movable member.

  Further, by forming the coin guard HP 30 into an L shape, the second guard portion HP 302 can be disposed between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP 1. This makes it possible to prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the hopper mechanism HP.

  Further, the coin guard HP30 has inclined surfaces HP301a and HP301b. Thereby, even when the medal is on coin guard HP30, since the medal is inclined to bucket HP1 side, the medal slides down to bucket HP1 side by its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in hopper mechanism HP it can.

(Hopper guide mechanism HG)
As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the substrate HG1 constituting the hopper guide mechanism HG is positioned with a screw at the center of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. 84, the substrate HG1 is a frame having a central opening HG11, and guide rails HG12 and HG13 formed by bending both sides of the substrate HG1 in the vertical direction are formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 83, on the front side of the substrate HG1, a lock member HG14 engaged with a locking member (not shown) provided at the bottom of the hopper mechanism HP is fixed by a screw. At the back, a connector G81 on the cabinet G side (corresponding to a housing side connector) is disposed.

  In addition, by the guide rails HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP being guided to the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the connector HP41 (see FIG. 85) provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is a connector G81 (hopper side connector Equivalent to).

  As shown in FIG. 84, the guide rails HG12 and HG13 are formed in a U shape by lower portions HG123 and HG133, side surfaces HG122 and HG132, and upper portions HG121 and HG131. Further, protruding portions HG124 and HG134 protruding in the vertical direction are formed above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. The projecting portions HG124 and HG134, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, the side surfaces HG122 and HG132, the lower portions HG123 and HG133, and the substrate HG1 are integrally formed by bending a single plate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, in the upper portions HG121 and HG131, the front side portion is formed in a tapered shape.

  The projecting portions HG124 and HG134 are formed to be disposed in front of the connector G81 on the cabinet G side in the upper portions HG121 and HG131. The protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are shorter in length in the depth direction than the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and are disposed behind the upper portions HG121 and HG131.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84, pedestal plates HG151, HG152, HG153 are formed on the back surface of the substrate HG1 to be in contact with the bottom plate G91 and to be pedestals of the connector G81. The base plates HG151, HG152, and HG153 are also formed integrally with the substrate HG1 by bending.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84, a planar space HG17 is provided on the front side of the substrate HG1 (the front side of the guide rails HG12 and HG13).

  As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP is between the lower part HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper part HG121 and HG131, respectively. The connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 by being slid to the back side of the cabinet G in a state of being sandwiched and engaged with each other.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, for example, a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on the side surface of the hopper mechanism HP is between the lower part HG123 and HG133 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and the upper part HG121 and HG131. When the hopper mechanism HP is slid to the back side of the cabinet G as it is, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 abut against the protrusions HG124 and HG134. It restricts the hopper mechanism HP from sliding behind the protrusions HG124 and HG134. Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the hopper mechanism HP in a state where the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are in contact with the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 is a back surface of the lower door mechanism DD when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (FIG. Protruding to a position where the two-dotted chain line DDB) is disposed, and when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it abuts against the hopper mechanism HP.

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is slide-installed on the hopper guide mechanism HG in order to electrically connect the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP to the connector G81 on the cabinet G side, both sides of the hopper mechanism HP When the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided are not engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and accidentally slipped above the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are not guided. The hopper mechanism HP slides in the wrong position by contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the rails HG12 and HG13 and on the front side of the connector G81, and the hopper mechanism HP contacts the connector G81. Can be prevented. That is, it becomes possible to slide and install the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G normally.
As a result, the hopper mechanism HP is slidingly installed at the wrong position, and the connector HP41 of the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented from contacting the connector G81 at the wrong position and damaging the connector G81 and the connector HP41.

  Also, when the hopper mechanism HP is slide-installed on the bottom of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both sides of the hopper mechanism HP are the upper portion HG121 and HG131 and the lower portion of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. When it is not caught between HG123 and HG133 and it is accidentally slipped over the upper part HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 are on the guide rails HG12 and HG13. By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the regions HG121 and HG131, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slidingly installed at an incorrect position. That is, it becomes possible to slide and install the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G normally.

  In addition, since the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 have a tapered shape, when guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the upper portions HG121 and HG121 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 The HG 131 can be prevented from contacting the hopper mechanism HP.

  Moreover, simplification of a manufacturing process can be achieved by producing the lower part HG123 * HG133 of a pair of guide rails HG12 * HG133, upper part HG121 * HG131, and the protrusion part HG124 * HG134 with the board of 1 sheet .

  Further, since the projecting portions HG124 and HG134 are on the back side of the cabinet G, they do not interfere when temporarily placing the hopper mechanism HP around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparatory step of guiding the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13. You can do so.

  Also, as a preparatory step before guiding the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP to the guide rails HG12 and HG13 in the planar space HG17 provided in front of the substrate HG1 (in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13), The hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. Thus, the hopper mechanism HP can be slide-installed on the hopper guide mechanism HG.

(Sheet metal BK)
As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a display unit A (corresponding to a rendering device) is provided in an upper space (corresponding to the upper part of the case) of the cabinet G (corresponding to the case). A power supply device DE and a hopper mechanism HP (corresponding to a hopper device) are provided at the bottom of the lower space (corresponding to the lower part of the cabinet) of the cabinet G. A sub controller SS (corresponding to a control means) is provided on the rear wall G3 side of G). That is, the hopper mechanism HP is disposed on the front side of the sub control device SS. A sheet metal BK is installed between the hopper mechanism HP and the sub controller SS. Also, a sub relay apparatus SN is provided between the sub control apparatus SS and the intermediate support plate G1. Above the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, a medal replenishment mechanism MH (corresponding to a replenishment port) to which a metallic medal is externally replenished is provided, and the medal is dropped onto the hopper mechanism HP from the medal replenishment mechanism MH. Be done.

  As illustrated in FIG. 90, the sheet metal BK is disposed above the corner on the back side of the left side of the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. Further, the sheet metal BK is disposed between the first facing surface BK1 facing the sub control device SS, the second facing surface BK2 facing the power supply device DE, and the bottom surface of the sub control device SS and the top surface of the bucket HP1. A third opposing surface BK3, a supporting surface BK4 projecting from the third opposing surface BK3 and fixing the sheet metal BK to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G with a screw, a fourth opposing surface BK7 corresponding to the medal replenishment mechanism MH, and a sheet metal BK Are fixed to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G by screws. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the sheet metal BK is formed by bending a single plate, and a rectangular third opposing surface BK3, which is in contact with the bottom surface of the sub control device SS, 3 Quadrangular support surface BK4 bent downward by 90 ° toward the back wall G3 side of the opposing surface BK3, and rectangular support surface BK5 folded downward by 90 ° toward the power supply device DE of the third opposing surface BK3 A quadrangular first opposing surface BK1 bent upward by 90 ° on the front side of the third opposing surface BK3 (a rectangular notch BK12 is formed on the upper right of the front view), the first opposing surface BK1 In the power supply device DE, the quadrangular second facing surface BK2 bent 90 ° in the front direction, the quadrangular fourth facing surface bent 90 ° on the back wall G3 side in the medal replenishment mechanism MH of the first facing surface BK1 BK6, fourth opposing surface BK6 A rectangular support surface BK7 bent 90 ° in the direction of the medal supply mechanism MH is formed on the back wall G3. The sheet metal BK is screwed to the corresponding back wall G3 via a screw hole BK41 formed in the support surface BK4 and a screw hole BK71 formed in the support surface BK7. As a result, the sub-control device SS is disposed so as to be sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the first opposing surface BK1 of the sheet metal BK. The sheet metal BK may be made of metal and may be fixed to the back wall G3 also made of metal via the support surface BK4.

  In the present embodiment, the sheet metal BK is not in contact with the sub control device SS. That is, the support surface BK4 and the first opposing surface BK1 are not in contact with the sub control device SS. The sheet metal BK may be directly attached to the bottom of the sub controller SS. Further, the thin-plate sub relay device SN removably attached to the lower surface of the intermediate support plate G1 and the thin plate sub-control device SS removably attached to the back wall G3 of the cabinet G are side views It is arranged in the state which turned L character upside down.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub controller SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if the medal is dropped to the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out to the sub controller SS side, the sheet metal BK Physical contact with the sub-control device SS can be prevented. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub controller SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metallic medals in the hopper mechanism HP.
Further, since the sub-control device SS is provided at the back side of the lower space of the cabinet G and is sandwiched by the back wall G3 and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control device SS does not remove the sheet metal BK. I can not remove it. Thereby, the security with respect to the sub control device SS is enhanced.

  In addition, since the medals are dropped from the medal supply mechanism MH to the hopper mechanism HP, the medals are more likely to be flipped by the hopper mechanism HP, and the distance by which the medals are flipped also increases. Since the sheet metal BK is provided between them, even if the medal is dropped by the hopper mechanism HP and jumps out largely to the sub control device SS side, the medal physically contacts the sub control device SS by the sheet metal BK. It can be prevented. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub controller SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metallic medals due to the dropping of the medals.

(Lower door mechanism DD)
(Lower door lock mechanism and upper door lock mechanism)
As shown in FIG. 93, a lower door lock mechanism G51 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the lower door mechanism DD (corresponding to the lower door). Further, an upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at the right end of the cabinet G and the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the upper door). The lower door lock mechanism G51 plays a role of locking so as to maintain the closed state with respect to the lower space (corresponding to the lower part of the housing) of the cabinet G. Further, the upper door lock mechanism G52 plays a role of locking so as to maintain a closed state with respect to the upper space (corresponding to the upper portion of the housing) of the cabinet G.

(Lower door lock mechanism G51)
The lower door lock mechanism G51 includes, as shown in FIG. 94, a locked portion G511 fixed to the right end portion of the back surface wall of the lower door mechanism DD, and a locking portion G512 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. And a cylinder lock G513.

  The to-be-locked portion G511 has, in the upper and lower portions, two rod-like, to-be-locked rods G511a and G511b formed over both ends of the frame G511c having a concave shape.

  The locking portion G512 has a long cylinder G5122 and a long locking plate G5121 slidably disposed in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5122.

  The locking plate G5121 has claw portions G5121a and G5121b in the shape of claws to be locked to the locked rods G511a and G511b. The claws G5121a and G5121b are engaged with the locking plates G5121 and slide in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5122 to thereby engage the locked rods inserted into the openings G5122a and G5122b provided in the cylinder G5122. G511a and G511b are locked or released. In addition, the locking plate G5121 has a spring biased upward.

  The claws G5121a and G5121b are engaged with the engaged rods G511a and G511b when the engagement plate G5121 is at the height position to lock the lower door mechanism DD, while the engagement plate G5121 is the lower door mechanism DD When it is lowered from the height position to lock the lock to the height position to release the lock, the lock with respect to the locked rods G511a and G511b is released. Further, the tip end surfaces of the claws G5121a and G5121b are inclined obliquely downward, and the claws G5121 and G5121b are pressed down by the contact with the locked rods G511a and G511b.

  Although not shown, the locking portion G512 has a pull-down portion in the middle. The pull-down portion enables the locking plate G5121 to be pulled down as the key is inserted into the cylinder lock G513 and is rotated. As a result, by lowering the locking plate G5121, the locking between the claws G5121a and G5121b and the locked rods G511a and G511b can be released.

(Top door lock mechanism G52)
As shown in FIG. 94, the upper door lock mechanism G52 includes a locked portion G521 fixed to the right end portion of the back surface wall of the upper door mechanism DU and a locking portion G522 fixed to the right end portion of the cabinet G. Have.

  The to-be-locked portion G521 has, in the upper and lower portions, two rod-like, to-be-locked rods G521a and G521b formed across the both ends of the concaved frame G521c.

  The locking portion G522 has a long cylinder G5222 (corresponding to a locking cylinder) and a long locking plate G5221 (corresponding to a locking member) disposed slidably in the vertical direction in the cylinder G5222. doing.

  The locking plate G5221 has claw portions G5221a and G5221b (corresponding to locking portions) in the shape of claws locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b. The claws G5221a and G5221b are engaged with the locking plates G5221 and slide vertically in the cylinder G5222 with the sliding of the locking plate G5221, thereby causing the engagement rods to be inserted into the openings G5222a and G5222b provided in the cylinder G5222. G521a and G521b are locked or unlocked (see FIG. 97).

  The claws G5221a and G5221b are engaged with the engaged rods G521a and G521b when the engagement plate G5221 is at the height position to lock the upper door mechanism DU, while the engagement plate G5221 is the upper door mechanism DU When it is lowered from the height position to lock the lock to the height position to release the lock, the lock on the locked rods G521a and G521b is released. Further, as shown in FIG. 96, the tip end surfaces of the claws G5221a and G5221b are inclined obliquely downward, and the claws G5221a and G5221b are pushed down by the contact with the locked rods G521a and G521b.

  In the cylinder G5222 of the locking portion G522, as shown in FIG. 95, an opening G5222c is formed below the upper door mechanism DU, and provided on the locking plate G5221 and the projection G5221c forms an opening G5222c. It protrudes to the inside side of the cabinet G through. By pulling the protrusion G5221c downward, the locking plate G5221 is lowered, and with this, the locking between the claws G5221a and G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can be released.

  Here, when the protrusion G5221c is slid upward and the locking plate G5221 is at a height position to lock the upper door mechanism DU, the protrusion G5221c is the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD (see FIG. 93). Are arranged to abut.

  According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the upper plate DDU of the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the projection G5221c, thereby preventing the locking plate G5221 from sliding, thereby preventing the claws from sliding. The locking between the portions G5221a and G5221b and the locked rods G521a and G521b can not be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be locked so as not to be opened.

  On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open, the physical interference with the projection G5221c of the upper DDU of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so the locking plate G5221 can slide in the cylinder G5222, and the claw The locking of the portions G5221a and G5221b with respect to the locked rods G521a and G521b is released, and the locking of the upper door mechanism DU on the cabinet G can be released.

  Thus, in order to release the locking of the upper door mechanism DU, a procedure for releasing the locking of the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door locking mechanism G51 can be required first. That is, to open the upper door mechanism DU, after unlocking the lower door lock mechanism G51 and opening the lower door mechanism DD, a procedure for unlocking the upper door lock mechanism G52 is necessary, and the upper space of the cabinet G Can enhance security against Further, the upper space of the cabinet G can be more secure than the lower space of the cabinet G, and the lower space of the cabinet G can be accessed more smoothly than the upper space of the cabinet G. It can be a place.

  Also, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with a key. The manager of the gaming machine 1 has the advantage of being easy to manage because the key is compact and portable.

  In addition, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claws G5221a and G5221b to be caught or released from the locked rods G521a and G521b. This makes it possible to lock the upper space of the cabinet G of the upper door mechanism DU interlocked with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

  Further, the upper door lock mechanism G52 is provided at an end opposite to the end supported by the shaft and is arranged on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, so the upper door lock mechanism G52 is unlocked. Therefore, it is not necessary to open the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, the lower space of the cabinet G does not have to be exposed to the outside unnecessarily, and security can be enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a one-way hinge DD54 is adopted between the lower door mechanism DD and the cabinet G, to which a predetermined torque is applied in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed. Thereby, when closing the lower door mechanism DD, torque is applied, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed to the cabinet G without applying a rapid load. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rapid load from being applied to the protrusion B 131 which is physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.

(Relationship between power supply device DE and speaker DD25L)
As shown in FIG. 99, a speaker DD25L (corresponding to an acoustic device) is provided at the lower portion on the back side (lower space side of the cabinet G (corresponding to a case) of the lower door DD1 (corresponding to a door) of the lower door mechanism DD. Is provided. On the other hand, in the lower space (corresponding to the inside of the case) of the cabinet G, a power supply device DE (corresponding to a power supply device) is provided. The speaker DD 25 L and the power supply device DE are disposed to face each other when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. 101).

  The power supply device DE is disposed on the left side of the hopper mechanism HP when the inside of the cabinet G is viewed from the front. The power supply device DE plays the role of converting the power of the AC voltage supplied from the outside into the power of the DC voltage required in each part, and supplying the converted power to the respective devices constituting the gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 100, on the front side of the power supply device DE, a power switch DE1 is provided which switches whether or not power is supplied to the devices constituting the gaming machine 1 (ON / OFF). Further, two slide rails DE3 are provided in the vertical direction on both sides of the power switch DE1. The switch cover DE2 can slide the slide rail DE3 in the vertical direction. Thus, when the switch cover DE2 is slid downward along the slide rail DE3, as shown in FIG. 99, the switch cover DE2 covers the power switch DE1 (the closed state of the switch cover DE2). On the other hand, when the switch cover DE2 is slid upward along the slide rail DE3, as shown in FIG. 100, the power switch DE1 is exposed (the open state of the switch cover DE2). By providing the switch cover DE2 in this manner, the power switch DE1 can not be accessed directly from the outside, thereby enhancing security.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the switch cover DE2 has an inclined surface DE2a inclined so as to protrude downward from above.

  On the other hand, on the back side (the side facing the power supply device DE) of the speaker DD25L, as shown in FIG. 101, a convex portion DD25L1 (corresponding to an engagement portion) protruding toward the power supply device DE is formed. The convex portion DD25L1 has an inclined surface DD25La inclined so as to protrude upward from below.

  In the speaker DD25L, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed with respect to the cabinet G, the projection DD25L1 interrupts the upper side (sliding path) of the switch cover DE2 when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state. It is formed in the position which controls that cover DE2 slides upward.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back surface of the lower door DD1 interrupts the sliding path (moving path) of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 It can be regulated to be in the open state. On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex part DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided on the back of the lower door DD1 is released, so the switch cover DE2 is slid upward, and the power switch It becomes possible to switch from the closed state in which the operation of the DE 1 is not possible to the open state in which the operation of the power switch DE 1 is possible.
As a result, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 in the state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE and to enhance security.

  Further, by sliding the switch cover DE2 up and down, it is possible to switch between the open state and the closed state. This makes it possible to facilitate access to the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD open.

  Further, since the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the speaker DD25L has a convex shape, the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased by the amount of protrusion on the side of the power supply device DE, and the sound quality can be simultaneously improved. .

Further, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are arranged opposite to each other. Movement can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is at a position shifted upward from the position of the closed state, so the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is a switch The switch cover DE2 slides downward and moves to the closed position in order to abut on the inclined surface DE2a of the cover DE2 and press it.
Thereby, even if the switch cover DE2 is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2, for example. Since it presses in contact, it is possible to slide the switch cover DE2 and move it to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(Max bet button DD8)
The maximum BET button DD8 (corresponding to a button unit) is disposed on the second pedestal DD2b (corresponding to a pedestal). As shown in FIG. 102, an opening DD2ba is formed in the second pedestal DD2b. As shown in FIG. 105, the opening DD2ba has a predetermined depth, has a side wall DD2bc so as to surround the opening DD2ba, and a flange DD2bb is formed at the bottom of the side wall DD2bc. As shown in FIG. 102, the maximum BET button DD8 is configured of an operation unit DD81 and a locking unit DD82.

(Operation unit DD81)
As shown in FIG. 106, the operation unit DD81 includes a first member DD812, a button base DD811, a spring DD813 (corresponding to an elastic member), a photosensor DD814, a second member DD815, and a button base cover DD816. Have.

  The first member DD 812 has a button base DD 8123, a button cover DD 8121, and a button sheet DD 8122. The first member DD 812 is disposed so as to be able to be pushed downward (direction A), as shown in FIG.

  Button cover portion DD8121 is disposed on the upper side of button base DD8123. The button cover portion DD8121 is engaged with and fixed to the edge of the button base DD8123. The button cover unit DD8121 has a function as a cover that constitutes a surface on which the player is directly pressed.

  The button sheet DD8122 is disposed between the button base DD8123 and the button cover portion DD8121. The button sheet DD8122 is made of a flat plate-like light transmitting resin sheet and has light distribution.

  The button base DD 8123 is disposed on the upper side of the button base DD 811. The button base DD 8123 has two cylindrical sliding portions DD 8124 a and DD 8124 b on the lower side. A cylindrical screw hole is formed on the lower side of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. Further, a spring holding portion DD8124c for holding the spring DD813 is formed between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. The spring holding portion DD8124c is formed to have substantially the same size as the inner diameter of the spring DD813.

  Between the button base DD 8123 and the button base DD 811 is provided a spring DD 813 having an elastic force that repels a force that pushes the first member DD 812 downward (direction A). The spring DD 813 is formed of a coil spring formed in a cylindrical shape. The spring DD 813 one end is disposed on the outer periphery of the spring holding portion DD 8124 c and held. Further, the other end of the spring DD 813 is in contact with the lower portion of the button base DD 811. For this reason, the spring DD 813 repels against the force that the player pushes the button cover portion DD 8121 of the first member DD 812 downward (direction A).

  The button base DD 811 is formed in a rectangular box shape whose upper surface is opened. In the lower part of the button base DD811, two through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed. The through holes DD811a and DD811b are opened in the vertical direction, and the two slide portions DD8124a and DD8124b can slide. Therefore, the outer dimensions of the through holes DD811a and DD811b are larger than the inner diameters of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b. Further, a flange DD8111 protruding outward is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the button base DD811. The flange DD8111 abuts on the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba provided in the second pedestal DD2b (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD8111 has a shape larger than the outer shape of the opening DD2ba, and when the operation part DD81 is inserted from above the opening DD2ba, the portion including the bottom of the button base DD811 and the four side surfaces is , And passes through the opening DD2ba, but the flange DD8111 is regulated by coming into contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba.

  In addition, the button base DD811 is provided with a stop plate DD8112, which protrudes in the horizontal direction, on the side surface portion DD8113 which is extended from the side surface of the button base DD811. Further, in the side surface portion DD8113, two communication holes DD816a and DD816b are formed. The shape and area of the bottom surface of the button cover portion DD8121 and the shape and area of the upper surface portion of the button base DD811 including the flange DD8111 are the same. That is, the button cover part DD8121 and the button base DD811 are shaped so as to be perfectly overlapped in the vertical direction.

  The second member DD 815 is disposed below the button base DD 811 (direction A). In the second member DD815, cylindrical screw holes DD815a and DD815b are formed. The sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b of the button base DD8123 pass through the through holes DD811a and DD811b, and the lower sides of the sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extend from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. The screw holes formed on the lower side of the above and the screw holes DD815a and DD815b formed in the second member DD815 are screwed together by the screws DD8152a and DD8152b. As a result, the second member DD 815 is attached between the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b. The second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

  In the second member DD815, a thin-plate shaped light shielding piece DD8151 protruding in the vertical direction is provided between the screw hole DD815a and the screw hole DD815b.

  Below the second member DD 815 (direction A), a photosensor DD 814 is provided in which the light emitting unit DD 814 a and the light receiving unit DD 814 b face each other at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. The predetermined interval is set larger than the thickness in the horizontal direction of the light shielding piece DD8151. A transmission connector is provided on the back of the photosensor DD 814 and connected by an external connector DD 85.

  The button base cover DD 816 is formed in a box shape with the lower side of the button base DD 811 and the side opposite to the side face DD 8113 opened. Hook-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are formed above the button base cover DD816, and hook-shaped locking portions DD8161 and DD8162 are provided on the lower portion of the button base DD811. Locked portions DD8113a and DD8113b As a result, the button base cover DD 816 is fixed to the lower part of the button base DD 811. Further, in the button base cover DD816, two screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b are formed.

  When the player presses the first member DD 812 downward (direction A), the second member DD 815 also moves downward (direction A). The movement of the second member DD815 causes the light shielding piece DD8151 to interrupt between the light emitting unit DD814a and the light receiving unit DD814b, and blocks the light emitted from the light emitting unit DD814a to the light receiving unit DD814b. As a result, it is detected that the player has operated the maximum bet button DD8.

  Then, when the player stops pressing the first member DD812 downward (direction A), the button base DD8123 moves upward by the repulsive force of the spring DD813 (the first member DD812 is at the initial position). Come back). When the button base DD 8123 moves upward due to the repulsive force of the spring DD 813, the upper surface of the second member DD 815 abuts against the lower surface of the stop plate DD 8112, and the second member DD 815 and the first member DD 812 return too high. Regulate that.

  As a result, the second member DD815 moves upward, and the light shielding piece DD8151 inserted between the light emitting unit DD814a and the light receiving unit DD814b also moves upward, and light is emitted from the light emitting unit DD814a to the light receiving unit DD814b. Blockage of light is released. Thus, it is detected that the player has not operated the maximum bet button DD8.

  According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and the sliding portion DD8124a of the first member DD812 extends from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. -It is attached to DD8124b. As a result, the second member DD 815 restricts the sliding portions DD 8124 a and DD 8124 b of the first member DD 812 from coming out of the through holes DD 811 a and DD 811 b, thereby preventing unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD 8.

  In the light shielding piece DD8151, the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b slide along the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 in conjunction with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player, and the two through holes are formed. A light shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding parts DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the DD811a and DD811b cuts off between the light emitting part DD814a and the light receiving part DD814b. can do.

(Locking part DD82)
As shown in FIG. 103, the locking portion DD82 has a box shape, and connects the opening DD821 formed on the upper surface of the locking portion DD82 and the connector DD85 to the back surface of the operation portion DD81. It has an opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82.

  An outwardly extending flange DD823 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the opening DD821 of the locking portion DD82, and the flange DD823 is further vertically extended so as to surround the flange DD823. An enclosure DD 824 is formed. The flange DD823 abuts on the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba (see FIG. 105). Therefore, the flange DD823 has a shape larger than the outer diameter of the opening DD2ba, and when the locking portion DD82 is pressed from below the opening DD2ba, the flange DD823 portion is in contact with the lower surface of the flange DD2bb. It is regulated by touching.

  On the inner wall side of the locking portion DD82, a locking piece DD825 for positioning the operation portion DD81 when the operation portion DD81 is stored is formed. Further, communication holes DD826a and DD826b provided on both sides of the opening DD822 formed on the back surface of the locking portion DD82 are formed.

  With the operation part DD81 inserted from above into the opening DD2ba and the flange DD8111 part in contact with the upper surface of the flange DD2bb, the locking part DD82 is attached to the operation part DD81 from below the opening DD2ba , And the flange DD823 abuts on the lower surface of the flange DD2bb of the opening DD2ba. The two screws DD83a and DD83b are screwed into the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b via the communication holes DD826a and DD826b and the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, respectively (see FIG. 104).

  According to the above configuration, the two screw DDs 83a and DD 83b are engaged with the operation portion DD 81 by screwing them into the screw holes DD 8163a and DD 8163b through the communication holes DD 826a and DD 826b and the communication holes DD 816a and DD 816b, respectively. The portion DD 82 can be fixed to the second pedestal portion DD 2 b via the opening DD 2 ba. Further, since the operation unit DD81 has the flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD8 from falling to the inside of the cabinet G from the outside of the opening DD2ba. Further, since the locking portion DD 82 also has the flange DD 823 larger than the opening DD 2 ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD 8 from coming out of the inside of the opening DD 2 ba to the outside of the cabinet G. As a result, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal DD2b.

In addition, since the button cover part DD8121 and the button base DD811 are shaped so as to exactly overlap in the vertical direction, when the button cover part DD8121 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is hidden by the button cover part DD8121 In addition, it is possible to show only the button cover part DD 8121 pressed by the player. Thereby, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
Further, compared with the case where the shape of the bottom surface of the button cover portion DD8121 is smaller than the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811, it is easy to prevent unauthorized intrusion from the gaps of the through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811. be able to.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device M1)
(Lower door mechanism DD)
In the lower door mechanism DD, as shown in FIG. 107, a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided substantially at the center of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Further, a main control board MS is attached to the back of the reel unit RU.

  The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each. The reels RL, RC, RR are arranged in parallel (one horizontal row) so that they can be rotated at a constant speed in the longitudinal direction. As for the reels RL, RC, and RR, the operation of the respective reels RL, RC, and RR and the symbols drawn on the respective reels RL, RC, and RR become visible through the main display window DD4.

  A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface portion of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like can not touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, first, second, and third pedestal portions DD2a, DD2b, DD2c of substantially horizontal surfaces are formed. In the first pedestal DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4, a medal insertion slot DD5 for inserting a medal is provided. The medal insertion slot DD5 is an opening where a player inserts a medal. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 is credited or bet on the game.

  The second pedestal DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAX BET button) as an effective line setting means for betting a credited medal. When the maximum bet button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of medals inserted.

  A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided in the third pedestal DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is disposed on a panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects a touch of a part of a human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal, or It may be of a type that detects contact of a hard material such as a pen point and outputs a detection signal, or of another type or structure (such as an in-cell structure).

  The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and for example, along with the progress of the game, game information such as the number of times of playing is displayed on the display screen, and selected by the player Or a message for asking for an input, an input key, etc. are displayed.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, it is also possible to display content (rendering information) according to the rendition relating to the game as the game progresses. In addition, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a rendering combination or a dedicated attachment may be attached with a jog dial or a push button. The liquid crystal display device DD20 can also be omitted by assigning its function to a display unit A or the like described later.

  On the front side of the maximum BET button DD8, a start lever DD6 is provided which causes the reels RL, RC, and RR to be rotationally driven by the operation of the player, and to start variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is tiltably attached at a predetermined angle range.

  On the right side of the start lever DD6, on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, RR by the pressing operation (stop operation) of the player. , DD7C, DD7R are provided.

  A C / P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C / P button DD13 is used to switch the credits / payouts of the medals obtained by the player in the game by pushing a button. In the state (non-credit state) in which payout is selected by switching the C / P button DD13, medals are output from the medal payout outlet DD14 (cancel shoot) provided on the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid out medals are collected in the medal receiver DD15.

  A waist panel DD18 (a waist light guide plate) is disposed below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a cosmetic panel using an acrylic plate or the like. On the waist panel DD18, a name representing the model of the gaming machine 1 and various patterns are drawn by printing.

  In addition, a speaker DD25L is provided on the left side of the medal payout opening DD14, and a speaker DD25R is provided on the right side. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information related to the game by sounds such as voice and music. In addition, the first sub-display device DD19L and the second sub-display device DD19R are respectively disposed on the left side and the right side of the main display window DD4. The sub display devices DD19L and DD19R, for example, display the number of medals paid out when a winning is established and the number of remaining medals being credited. Usually, since the maximum number of medals credited to the gaming machine 1 is 50, the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed. When the maximum number of 50 medals has been credited, the inserted medal is paid out from the medal payout port DD14 as it is. The sub display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

(Relationship between lower door DD1, reel unit RU, and main control board MS)
As shown in FIG. 108, the lower door mechanism DD of the gaming machine 1 includes the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS.

  The lower door DD1 (corresponding to a door) is provided openably and closably with respect to a cabinet G (corresponding to a housing) as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the reel unit RU (corresponding to the symbol display means) is detachably provided on the back side of the lower door DD1 (inside of the cabinet G (lower space side)). Further, as shown in FIG. 110, the main control board MS is detachably provided on the back side of the reel unit RU (inside (lower space side) of the cabinet G).

  The main control board MS rotates the reels RL, RC, RR of the reel unit RU based on command signals output by the start lever DD6, the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R (corresponding to command means), etc. Is equivalent to control means for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reels RL, RC and RR.

  By integrating the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS according to the positional relationship between the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS as described above, the gaming machine 1 is provided. It is possible to easily perform the work of assembling, replacing parts and disassembling.

  Also, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, removal is difficult. It can be configured.

  The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. Thereby, the main control board MS can be disposed on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Therefore, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control board MS, and even if it is an illegal intrusion from the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control board MS is reached. Can be difficult to improve security.

  Further, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrated, when changing the specification of the gaming machine 1, the change of the exterior of the lower door DD1, the reel RL of the reel unit RU, It is possible to collectively change the symbols of RC and RR and change the game contents.

  Specifically, the attachment of the main control board MS to the reel unit RU will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 111, the reel unit RU has a substrate contact surface RU 9a at the rear. The substrate contact portion RU9a is a flat portion extending in the left-right direction at the center in the vertical direction on the back side of the reel unit RU. The normal direction of the flat portion substantially matches the front-rear direction. Further, the reel unit RU has an upper flat portion RU9b above the center right of the substrate contact portion RU9a. The upper flat portion RU9b is a flat portion whose surface direction coincides with that of the substrate contact surface RU9a, and has a screw hole at the upper left portion. Further, the reel unit RU has a mounting portion RU 9c below the substrate contact surface RU 9a, in which the length in the left-right direction substantially matches the substrate contact surface RU 9a. The mounting portion RU9c has a wall surface portion whose plane direction coincides with the substrate contact surface portion RU9a and the upper plane portion RU9b, a bottom surface portion bent and extended in the horizontal rearward direction from the lower portion of the wall surface portion, and a rear surface portion And an inclined portion which is bent from the end and is extended upward and rearward. The mounting unit RU 9 c has screw holes at both end portions in the left-right direction. Further, the reel unit RU has a flat surface portion in which the surface direction coincides with the substrate contact surface portion RU9a and the upper flat surface portion RU9b.

  The main control substrate MS is placed on the bottom surface of the placement unit RU9c, and is in plane contact with the substrate contact surface RU9a, the upper flat surface RU9b, the wall surface of the placement unit RU9c, and other flats whose plane direction matches. It is positioned in the Then, in this state, through the through holes formed in the main control board MS, the upper flat portion RU9b and the mounting portion RU9c are screwed and screwed to the screw holes. As a result, the main control substrate MS is stably attached to the substrate contact surface unit RU9a, the upper flat surface unit RU9b, and the placement unit RU9c disposed on the same surface.

  Next, attachment of the reel unit RU to the lower door DD1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 112, the reel unit RU has a reel hinge RU21 at its left end. The reel hinge RU21 is a U-shaped flat plate member in plan view, and the normal direction of the plane substantially coincides with the front-rear direction. The reel hinge RU21 has an upper hinge RU21a formed downward from the upper left end. Further, the reel hinge RU21 has a lower hinge RU21b formed downward from the lower left end. The upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b are formed such that their central axes coincide with each other.

  A reel hinge base DD18 extending from the upper end to the central portion is provided at the inner upper left portion of the lower door DD1. The reel hinge base DD18 has an upper hinge base DDR18a and an upper hinge base DDR18b at positions corresponding to the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. The upper hinge base DDR18a and the lower hinge base DDR18b are capable of inserting the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b, respectively, and in the inserted state, the reel unit RU is centered on the upper hinge RU21a and the lower hinge RU21b. It supports rotatably.

The reel unit RU has an upper right lock portion RU22 protruding rightward at the upper right end. Further, the reel unit RU has a lower lock portion RU 23 which protrudes downward from the lower end portion substantially at the center. The upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are lockable in a state of being in contact with the inner wall surface of the lower door DD1. That is, when the reel unit RU is rotated in the direction of the lower door DD1 and brought into contact with the lower door DD1, the upper right lock part RU22 and the lower lock part RU23 come into contact with the lower door DD1 in a engaged state. By locking the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 to the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU can be maintained in a non-rotatable state. A knob member is rotatably provided on the rear surface side of the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23. By rotating the knob member in a state in which the upper right lock portion RU22 and the lower lock portion RU23 are engaged with the lower door DD1, it is possible to switch between the rotatable state and the locked state of the reel unit RU. It has become. The reel unit RU is in the locked state,
The lower door DD1 may be lockable. Also, the main control board MS may be lockable to the reel unit RU.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device RU)
As shown in FIG. 113, the reel device RU has three reel units RU1, a reel base RU2, and a reel cover RU3. The three reel units RU1 are arranged in parallel (in a single row) in the left-right direction. The left reel unit RU1 has a reel RL, the center reel unit RU1 has a reel RC, and the right reel unit RU1 has a reel RR. Each reel unit RU1 is independently supported by the reel base RU2. The reel base RU2 is formed in a box shape having an open surface, and accommodates each reel unit 1 in a partially exposed state. Reel cover RU3 is attached by screw fastening so that reel base RU2 may cover this open side. In a state where the reel cover RU3 is attached to the reel base RU2, the outer peripheral surface extending from the center to the upper part of the reels RL, RC, RR in each reel unit RU1 is exposed from the reel base RU2. As a result, the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels RL, RC, RR become visible.

  Further, the reel unit RU1 has a motor mounting plate RU11 which is a support plate for supporting a shaft of the reel and to which a motor serving as a driving force of the reel is attached. The motor mounting plate RU11 is disposed on the right side of the reel unit RU1 and rotatably supports the reel. That is, they are disposed so as to be sandwiched between the adjacent reel units RU1. The motor mounting plate RU11 has a front portion RU11a forming a front portion. The front part RU11a is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. The bow shape is a figure surrounded by a circular arc and a chord connecting the ends of the circular arc.

  Specifically, the motor mounting plate RU11 has a front portion RU11a having a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and a shape continuously formed rearward from both ends of an arc defining the bow in a side view (for example, a side view And a substantially rectangular rear portion RU 11 b. The motor mounting plate RU11 may support the reel directly or may support the reel indirectly via another member.

  It is desirable that the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view has substantially the same size as the front portion of the opposing reel, and that both overlap each other. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the motor mounting plate RU11 is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel facing the portion by the front portion of the support plate. Is preferably completely covered. As a result, it is possible to realize in a well-balanced manner the function as a partition plate for the motor mounting plate RU11 and the maintenance of the aesthetics of the gaming machine.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device RU: Reel unit RU1)
The reel unit RU1 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the three reel units RU1 have the same configuration, only the right reel unit RU1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 114, on the motor mounting plate RU11 of the reel unit RU1, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, the motor drive unit RU113, and the drive control board RU114 are disposed. The reel index RU111 is disposed at the center of the motor mounting plate RU11. The sensor unit RU112 is disposed behind the reel index RU111. Motor drive unit RU 113 is disposed above reel index RU 111.

  The reel RR has a reel drum RR1. The reel drum RR1 is formed in a tubular shape, and a reel band RR2 on which a plurality of symbols are arranged is wound and fixed. In the reel drum RR1, a frame for enhancing rigidity is disposed on a surface on the left side of this cylindrical portion (opposite to the motor mounting plate RU11), concentrically radially from the center and smaller than the outer peripheral circle. . This frame has a shape in which the central portion is recessed in the right direction (cylindrical inner side). In the reel drum RR1, a rotary gear RR3 having the same center axis is disposed on the left side (frame side) of the cylindrical interior. That is, inside the reel drum RR1, the reel index RU111, the sensor unit RU112, and the motor drive unit RU113 are disposed on the right side (motor attachment plate RU11) of the rotary gear RR3. In the reel drum RR1, a back light RR4 is disposed on the radially inner wall surface inside the cylindrical shape to illuminate from behind the symbol arranged on the reel RR stopped.

  Motor drive unit RU 113 has a stepping motor and a drive gear meshing with rotation gear RR3, and the power from the stepping motor for rotating reel RR is transmitted by rotation gear RR3. The stepping motor is rotated by the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU114. That is, the number of drive pulses supplied from the drive control board RU 114 can identify how much the reel RR has been rotated from the reference position (the degree of displacement). The motor drive unit RU 113 controls the start and stop of rotation by the drive control board RU 114 according to a control signal from the main control board MS. Specifically, a start command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to the player's operation on the start command means such as the start lever DD6. The main control board MS transmits a start control signal to the drive control board RU 114 in response to detection of the start command signal. Drive control board RU114 drives motor drive part RU113 triggered by having detected a start control signal, and reel RR is rotated. Thereby, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are variably displayed. A stop command signal is transmitted to the main control board MS in response to the player's operation on the stop command means such as the stop button DD7R. Main control board MS transmits a stop control signal to drive control board RU 114 in response to detection of the stop command signal. Drive control board RU114 drives motor drive part RU113 triggered by having detected a stop control signal, and reel RR is stopped. Thereby, the symbols arranged on the reel RR are stopped and displayed.

(Lower door mechanism DD: Reel device RU: Reel unit RU1: Reel index RU 111)
The reel index RU111 includes a reel shaft RU1111, a detection piece RU1112, and a connection plate RU1113. The reel shaft RU 1111 is rotatable about the left and right direction at the reel index RU 111. The reel shaft RU 1111 can be connected and fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotary gear RR 3 at the left end, and is rotated as the rotary gear RR 3 rotates. That is, as the reel RR is rotated by the motor drive unit RU 113, the reel shaft RU 1111 is rotated. The detection piece RU 1112 is formed in a shape of a figure surrounded by an arc-shaped outer periphery and an arc-shaped inner periphery in a side view. In this embodiment, the angles of the arcs of the outer periphery and the inner periphery of the detection piece RU 1112 are set to 180 degrees, respectively, and a disc having a concentric opening at the center is cut at a line passing through the center point. ing. A disc-shaped connecting plate RU 1113 is connected to the inner periphery of the detection piece RU 1112 along the inner periphery. The connection plate RU 1113 has a circular hole at the center, and the reel shaft RU 1111 is inserted and fixed. Thus, the reel index RU 111 is connected to the rotating gear RR 3 via the reel shaft RU 1111. Therefore, the reel index RU 111 and the rotating gear RR 3 are formed separately from each other. It is preferable to use a material having high slidability for the rotary gear RR3. Further, it is preferable to use a material excellent in the antistatic function for the detection piece RU 1112 in the reel index RU 111.

  Thus, as shown in FIG. 115, detection piece RU 1112 is a circumferential RUD as shown by an arrow in the figure, centering on the rotation shaft of reel shaft RU 1111, as the reel shaft RU 1111 (reel RR) rotates. It is supposed to be rotated along the. The sensor unit RU112 is disposed on the motor mounting plate RU11 such that a detection point RUP indicated by a star on the circumference RUD is a detection position. That is, it is detected by the sensor unit RU112 whether the detection piece RU1112 is present at the detection point RUP.

  The relationship between the detection piece RU 1112 and the detection state will be described with reference to FIG. In the following, it is assumed that the rotation of the reel RR is continued. First, in step SRU 1, one end of the detection piece RU 1112 reaches the detection point RUP (on edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU 1112 is started by the sensor unit RU 112. At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (first reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state in which the detection piece RU 1112 is not detected to the state in which the detection piece RU 1112 is detected. Thereafter, while the detection piece RU 1112 continues to exist at the detection point RUP, the state in which the detection piece RU 1112 is detected by the sensor unit RU 112 is continued (SRU 2). Then, the other end of the detection piece RU 1112 reaches the detection point RUP (off edge), and the detection of the detection piece RU 1112 by the sensor unit RU 112 is ended (SRU 3). At this time, the main control board MS detects the reference position (second reference position) of the reel RR by changing from the state in which the detection piece RU 1112 is detected to the state in which the detection piece RU 1112 is not detected. That is, the detection unit RU 1112 is continuously detected by the sensor unit RU 112 until the second reference position is reached after the position of the reel RR has become the first reference position. Thereafter, the sensor unit RU 112 continues the state in which the detection piece RU 1112 is not detected until one end of the detection piece RU 1112 reaches the detection point RUP (SRU 4).

  In this manner, the first reference position and the second reference position are alternately detected each time the reel RR makes a half rotation, and the position of the reel RR is specified based on the detected first reference position or the second reference position. Be done. Specifically, the main control board MS is supplied from the drive control board RU 114 based on the control of the main control board MS with respect to the reference position (the first reference position or the second reference position) detected immediately before. The position of the reel RR is specified by adding a displacement corresponding to the number of drive pulses. Thus, the main control board MS is a reference position for specifying whether the reel RR has reached the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) based on the detection of the detection piece RU 1112 by the sensor unit RU 112. It functions as a specific means. Also, the main control board MS and the drive control board RU 114 function as a reel position specifying means for specifying the degree of displacement from the reference position (first reference position or second reference position) of the reel RR accompanying rotation. Do.

  As described above, the detection piece RU 1112 is formed in the shape of a figure surrounded by the arc-shaped outer periphery and the arc-shaped inner periphery, and the angle of the arc is set to 180 degrees. Therefore, the first reference position and the second reference position on the reel RR are disposed opposite to each other on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel RR with the central axis interposed therebetween.

  As described above, the first reference position of the reel RR is detected by detecting that the sensor unit RU 112 has changed to the state in which the detection unit RU 1112 is detected from the state in which the detection unit RU 1112 is not detected by the sensor unit RU 112. It can be identified. Further, as described above, the second reference of the reel RR is detected by detecting that the sensor unit RU112 has changed to a state in which the detection unit RU1112 is not detected from the state in which the detection unit RU1122 is detected by the sensor unit RU112. The position can be identified. In this way, it is possible to detect the reference position of the reel twice while the reel RR makes one rotation, and the same effect as in the case where two sensors are provided can be obtained.

  In addition, on the circumferential path on which the detection piece rotates, the region from the position corresponding to the first reference position to the position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path is included, and corresponds to the second reference position The shape of the detection piece is not limited as long as it has a shape that does not include an area extending from the position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

(Lower door mechanism DD: reel unit RU: reel unit RU1: sensor unit RU112)
As shown in FIG. 117, with the left side surface (reel mounting side surface) of the motor mounting plate RU11 as a bottom surface, screw fastening is performed so that the sensor unit RU112 is placed. The sensor unit RU112 includes a sensor RU1121 and a pedestal member RU1122. The sensor RU 1121 is a transmission sensor that detects a detection piece RU 1112 that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel RR rotates. The sensor RU1121 is formed in a concave shape in which the center is recessed, and is provided so that the recess direction and the central axis of the reel shaft RU1111 of the reel index RU111 are orthogonal to each other. The sensor RU1121 is attached to the motor attachment plate RU11 via the pedestal member RU1122 so that the edge of the rotation surface of the detection piece RU1112 of the reel index RU111 passes through the hollow inner space of the sensor RU1121.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the pedestal member RU1122 has a pedestal base RU1122g having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction and a pedestal RU1122h projecting leftward from the center of the pedestal base RU1122g. There is. The pedestal base portion RU1122g has a shape in which a semicircle is extended in the vertical direction of the rectangular flat plate. In the pedestal base RU1122g, screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b penetrating in the left-right direction are opened at the upper and lower positions. The pedestal base portion RU1122g is formed in a rectangular shape in a concave shape on the front side, and has a projecting portion RU1122j projecting rightward at the center of the concave side edge. The pedestal base RU1122g is formed in a rectangular shape so that the rear side is convex, and a protrusion RU1122k projecting in a cylindrical shape in the right direction is provided at the center of the convex side edge.

  The pedestal column portion RU1122h has a plane having a longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends at the left direction end, and has screw holes RU1122c and RU1122d at the upper and lower positions of the plane. Further, in the pedestal column portion RU1122h, the plane of the left end portion protrudes forward from the center in the vertical direction. The pedestal portion RU1122h has projecting portions RU1122e and RU1122f juxtaposed in the front-rear direction at this projecting portion and projecting in a cylindrical shape in the left direction.

(Mounting of pedestal member RU1122 to motor mounting plate RU11)
In the motor mounting plate RU11, fitting holes RU11e and RU11f are formed at positions corresponding to the protruding portions RU1122f and RU1122g of the base member RU1122. The protrusions RU1122j and RU1122k are respectively inserted into the fitting holes RU11e and RU11f, whereby the pedestal member RU1122 is positioned with respect to the motor mounting plate RU11. Further, in the motor mounting plate RU11, screw holes RU11c and RU11d are formed at positions corresponding to the screw holes RU1122a and RU1122b in the base member RU1122. By screwing the screw RU 1124 a into the screw hole RU 1122 a and the screw hole RU 11 c and screwing the screw RU 1 124 b into the screw hole RU 1122 b and the screw hole RU 11 d from the base member RU 1122 to the right, The pedestal member RU1122 is screwed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 120, the mounting position of the base member RU1122 to the motor mounting plate RU11 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, in the motor mounting plate RU11, the screw holes RU11c and the screw holes RU11d are disposed on a straight line RUDA. The fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are disposed at two points on the straight line RUDB substantially perpendicular to the straight line RUDA. Further, the fitting hole RU11e and the fitting hole RU11f are located on opposite sides of the straight line RUDA. The straight line RUDB is a straight line passing through the center obtained by bisecting the line connecting the screw hole RU11c and the screw hole RU11d. Here, the fitting hole RU 11 f has a longitudinal direction in the straight RUDB direction. Accordingly, it is possible to allow an error in the spacing in forming the two positioning protrusions in the pedestal member RU1122. Further, the longitudinal direction of the fitting hole RU 11 f is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of the rotation of the detection piece RU 1112 at the detection position of the sensor RU 1121. As a result, even if a positional deviation from the base member RU1122 occurs in the fitting hole RU11f having the longitudinal direction, it is possible to prevent an erroneous detection of the reference position by the sensor RU1121.

(Mounting of sensor RU1121 to pedestal member RU1122)
The sensor RU 1121 engages with the plane of the left end of the pedestal member RU 1122 and has a plane substantially equal in shape to the plane of the left end of the pedestal RU 1122. That is, the plane located at the right end of the sensor RU 1121 has a longitudinal direction at the top and bottom, and protrudes forward from the center at the top and bottom. In the pedestal portion RU1122h, fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f are formed parallel to each other in the front-rear direction at the projecting portion. Also, screw holes RU1121a and RU1121b penetrating in the left-right direction are opened at the upper and lower positions of the plane. Screw hole RU1121b is formed in the shape of a long hole having a longitudinal direction at the top and bottom. The fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f are disposed at positions corresponding to the protruding portions RU1122e and RU1122f of the base member RU1122, and the sensor RU1121 is positioned with respect to the base member RU1122 by being inserted and inserted. Also, in the sensor RU1121, the base member is made by screwing the screw RU1123a into the screw hole RU1121a and the screw hole RU1122c and screwing the screw RU1123b into the screw hole RU1121b and the screw hole RU1122d from the sensor RU1121 side in the right direction. The sensor RU 1121 is screwed to the RU 1122.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 121, the mounting position of the sensor RU 1121 with respect to the pedestal member RU 1122 will be described. As shown in FIG. 121, in the base member RU1122, a screw hole RU1122c and a screw hole RU1122d are disposed on a straight line RUDC. The protrusion RU1122e and the protrusion RU1122f are disposed at two points on the straight RUDD substantially perpendicular to the straight RUDC. Further, the protruding portion RU1122e and the protruding portion RU1122f are located on the side where the sensor RU1121 detects the detection piece RU1112 rather than the straight line RUDC. The straight line RUDD is a straight line passing a center obtained by bisecting a line connecting the screw hole RU1122c and the screw hole RU1122d. Here, the screw hole RU1122b of the sensor RU1121 screwed together with the screw hole RU1122d has a longitudinal direction in the straight RUDC direction. Thereby, it is possible to allow an error in the spacing in forming the two screwing points in the sensor RU1121.

(Upper door mechanism DU)
As shown in FIG. 122, the cabinet G (corresponding to the housing) rotatably supports the upper door mechanism DU (corresponding to the door) at the left end. The upper door mechanism DU and the cabinet G are connected by the upper hinge mechanism UH, and the upper hinge mechanism UH is a slide member UH1 attached to the left end of the upper door mechanism UD as shown in FIGS. 123 and 124. And a shaft member UH2 attached to the left end of the upper space of the cabinet G.

  As shown in FIG. 124, in the slide member UH1, one plate is bent in three places to form a groove UH11. A bearing mechanism UH12, a positioning portion UH14, an engagement convex portion UH15, a bearing mechanism UH13, and an engagement convex portion UH16 are provided in the groove UH11 from the upper side (U direction).

  The bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13 have a rectangular shape, and are attached to the slide member UH1 by screws. At the bottoms of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, bearing portions UH121 and UH131 engaged with each other to be engaged with shaft portions UH21 and UH22 described later are formed. The bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are opened in a substantially circular shape at the bottom of the bearing mechanisms UH12 and UH13, and have a shape in which the mouth becomes smaller upward from the peripheral edge of the opening. The direction in which the centers of the openings of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are directed upward along the groove UH11 is defined as an axis UH121A.

  The positioning portion UH14 has a curved shape so as to be in contact with a curved surface of a support portion UH25 of a shaft member UH2 described later, and to position the shaft portion UH21 relative to the bearing portion UH121.

  The engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 are in the form of a thin plate projecting horizontally from the groove UH11. The engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16 play a role in engaging with engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 described later.

  The shaft member UH2 is formed by bending a single plate. The shaft member UH2 includes, from above, a shaft UH21 protruding from the upper surface of the support UH25, a support UH25, an engagement recess UH23, a shaft UH22 protruding from the upper surface of the support UH26, and a support UH26. , And an engagement recess UH 24 is provided.

  The shanks UH21 and UH22 have a conical shape. The shaft portions UH21 and UH22 play a role in polymerization and engagement with the bearing portions UH121 and UH131.

  The support portions UH25 and UH26 are provided on the shaft member UH2, and the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 are provided on the upper surface. Further, the side surface of the support portion UH25 has a curved shape, and positioning of the shaft portion UH21 with respect to the bearing portion UH121 can be performed by contacting with the curved surface of the positioning portion UH14.

  In the engagement plates UH27 and UH28 extended from the side surfaces of the support portions UH25 and UH26, engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 opened horizontally are formed. The engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 play a role of engaging with the engagement protrusions UH15 and UH16.

  Then, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU are made to slide, overlap, and engage with the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G from above. It becomes possible to attach the upper door mechanism DU to the cabinet G. At this time, it is desirable that the upper door mechanism DU perform the mounting operation with the cabinet G opened at 90 ° so that the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 do not engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 project toward the cabinet G side, but this projection height is a state where the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G (see FIG. At the height at which the engagement of the engagement projections UH15 and UH16 with the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 is released. Thus, when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at 60 ° with respect to the cabinet G, the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 of the slide member UH1 of the upper door mechanism DU and the shaft portion UH21 of the shaft member UH2 of the cabinet G have axes The upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and removed from the cabinet G in a state in which the restriction on the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 is released by sliding the UH 121A upward. It becomes.

  In addition, if the projection height of the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 is made smaller than that of the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is at an angle smaller than 60.degree. With respect to the cabinet G to set the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16. The restriction on the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and can be removed from the cabinet G. On the other hand, if the projecting height of the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 is made higher than in the present embodiment, the upper door mechanism DU is at an angle larger than 60.degree. With respect to the cabinet G in the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16. The restriction on the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 can be released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be slid upward and can be removed from the cabinet G.

According to the above configuration, the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle (60 ° in the present embodiment) with respect to the cabinet G. The bearings UH121 and UH131 are restricted from sliding along the axis UH121A. As a result, it is possible to restrict the release of the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 and to lock the removal of the upper door mechanism DU from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 move to the axis UH121A. It becomes possible to slide along. As a result, the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.
Further, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (90 ° open).

  As shown in FIG. 125, the upper door mechanism UD has a mechanism for emitting light in the upper side and the left and right sides of the upper side display window UD1 that transmits the image of the above-described display unit A forward. Specifically, the top panel mechanism HA disposed above the upper display window UD1, the upper left panel mechanism HB disposed in the upper left direction of the upper display window UD1, and the upper right disposed in the upper right direction of the upper display window UD1. A panel mechanism HC, a left horizontal panel mechanism HD disposed at the upper left of the upper display window UD1, a right lateral panel mechanism HE disposed at the upper right of the upper display window UD1, and a left direction of the upper display window UD1 It has a left front panel mechanism HF disposed at the lower portion and a right front panel mechanism HG disposed at the lower portion of the upper display window UD1 in the right direction. The details of each panel mechanism HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, HG will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 126, it has the panel base HH which comprises the framework of upper door mechanism UD. On the front side of the panel base HH, the above-mentioned panel mechanism HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, HG is provided. On the other hand, an upper door key receiving member HK, an upper door hinge member HM, and a center frame HL are provided on the back side of the panel base HH. The upper door key receiving member HK is screwed to the right side portion of the panel base HH. The upper door hinge member HM is screwed to the left side of the panel base HH. The center frame HL is horizontally disposed, and the right end and the left end are respectively connected to the lower ends of the upper door key receiving member HK and the upper door hinge member HM. A transparent panel UD11 is provided on the upper door key receiving member HK, the upper door hinge member HM, and the center frame HL. The transparent panel UD11 is attachable by screw fastening from the rear.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Decoration unit HA1)
As shown in FIG. 127, the top panel mechanism HA has a decoration unit HA1 that decorates the upper door mechanism UD while emitting light. The decoration unit HA1 forms a decoration convex portion that protrudes forward than the upper display window UD1. The decoration unit HA1 is provided with a top lens light guide plate HA14 of a seamless structure that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decoration convex portion. Thus, when a plurality of parts are joined to form the light guide plate of the decoration unit HA1, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the parts, but the top lens light guide plate HA14 of the seamless structure If so, it is possible to avoid the situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit HA1 provided with the top lens light guide plate HA14 having a seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, so an external force is applied from the player or the like located in front of the gaming machine. Even if it is done, it is difficult to cause deformation or breakage.

  The rear end portion of the decoration unit HA1 connected to the panel base HH substantially matches the width of the upper door mechanism UD in the left-right direction, and the width of the panel base HH in the left-right direction from both ends in the left-right direction It is reduced and is shaped to have an apex at the front center. That is, the decoration unit HA1 has a substantially isosceles triangle shape whose bottom side is the panel base HH side.

  As a result, even if the bending moment increases as approaching the front end away from the panel base HH, the decoration unit HA1 is reduced in rigidity by reducing the width in the lateral direction on the front end side, thereby reducing the rigidity and The strength is increased. As a result, the decoration unit HA1 has high rigidity and strength in the front area, so that it is difficult for deformation or breakage to occur even when an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front.

  The decoration unit HA1 has a top lens cover HA11, a top design sheet cover HA12, a design sheet HA13, a top lens light guide plate HA14, and a top lens light guide plate base HA15 arranged in this order from the upper side. The decoration unit HA1 also includes a top lens left LED substrate HA17 and a top lens right LED substrate HA18. The top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 are respectively disposed on the left side portion and the right side portion of the rear end portion of the decoration unit HA1. The top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 have a plurality of LED HA 17a and HA 18a at equal intervals in the left-right direction, and are installed to emit light forward from these LED HA 17a and HA 18a .

  The top lens cover HA11 constitutes an upper surface wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as to be able to transmit light. The top lens light guide plate HA14 is formed so that light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 is taken in from the rear end face and uniformly emitted from the front end face, and the design of the design sheet HA13 is top It is displayed on the top lens cover HA11 through the design seat cover HA12. The top lens light guide plate base HA15 constitutes the lower surface wall of the decoration unit HA1, and is formed so as not to transmit light.

  In the decoration unit HA1, a hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base HA15 and the top lens cover HA11, and the top design sheet cover HA12, the design sheet HA13 and the top lens light guide plate HA14 are accommodated in the hollow portion. Thus, the top lens light guide plate base HA15, the top lens cover HA11, the top lens light guide plate HA14, etc. are simply stacked and formed into a plate shape, and the rigidity in the second moment of area is high. .

  Further, an opening HA15a is formed in the top lens light guide plate base HA15. The opening HA 15 a is disposed to face the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens described later. The top lens middle LED substrate hiding member HA16 is provided in the opening HA15a, and the top lens middle LED substrate hiding member HA16 functions as a reflector for the top lens middle LED substrate HA411, and the opening HA15a is opened and closed. It functions as a window. The top lens middle LED substrate concealing member HA16 may be formed to transmit part of the light from the top lens middle LED substrate HA411.

  As shown in FIG. 128, in the decoration unit HA1, the front area is curved downward. Thus, the decorative unit HA1 transmits light to the front upper side and the front side of the upper door mechanism UD to make the design visible. The lower surface of the top lens light guide plate HA14 is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, in the decoration unit HA1, when light from the top lens left LED substrate HA17 and the top lens right LED substrate HA18 travels downward in the front region curved downward, a part of the light is reflected by the reflector on the back surface Can be changed to the front side obliquely downward direction.

  An illumination light device B is disposed behind the decoration unit HA1. Here, since the decoration unit HA1 is projected forward, a large space is secured behind the decoration unit HA1 by the amount of projection. Thereby, decoration unit HA1 can expand the freedom degree of arrangement of a mirror about irradiation light device B of light reflection type by the above-mentioned mirror provided in a big space. Furthermore, since the decoration unit HA1 is high in rigidity and strength, it is possible to sufficiently protect the irradiation light device B.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the top lens cover HA11 in the decoration unit HA1 is supported by the decoration unit support mechanism HI in which the downwardly curved front region is horizontally arranged. The decoration unit support mechanism HI includes a horizontal projection HA11a horizontally projecting backward from the back surface of the top lens cover HA11, a horizontal projection HH1 horizontally projecting forward from the front surface of the panel base HH, and a horizontal projection A plurality of coupling screws HH2 in which the portions HA11a and HH1 are screwed to each other are provided in the left-right direction.

  Thereby, in the decoration unit HA1, the back surface of the front region curved downward is connected to the panel base HH via the horizontally arranged decoration unit support mechanism HI, whereby the back surface of the front region is the decoration unit support mechanism It becomes horizontally supported by HI. Therefore, the decoration unit HA1 is structured such that the front region has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Left end light emitting mechanism HA2, Right end light emitting mechanism HA3)
As shown in FIG. 130, the top panel mechanism HA has a left end light emitting mechanism HA2 that causes the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD to emit light in a planar manner and a right end light emitting mechanism HA3 that emits light in a planar manner at the right end region of the upper door mechanism UD. have. Specifically, the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 is disposed at the left rear of the upper left speaker device UD2. The left end light emitting mechanism HA2 has a left LED substrate HA21. The left LED substrate HA21 is set such that the surface of the substrate faces the front side. Two LED HAs 22 are disposed on the surface of the left LED substrate HA21. These LED HAs 22 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and cause the area on the left side of the upper left speaker device UD2 (the left end area of the upper door mechanism UD) to emit light with a predetermined light intensity or more. It has become.

  On the other hand, the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 is disposed on the right rear of the upper right speaker device UD3. The right end light emitting mechanism HA3 has a right LED substrate HA31. The right LED substrate HA31 is set such that the surface of the substrate faces the front side. Two LED HAs 32 are disposed on the substrate surface of the right LED substrate HA 31. These LED HAs 32 are set so as to emit light in the normal direction of the substrate surface, and emit the right area of the upper right speaker device UD3 (right end area of the upper door mechanism UD) with a predetermined light intensity or more It has become.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4)
The top panel feature HA further comprises a central light emitting feature HA4. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is disposed on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD which is between the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 is configured to cause the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 to emit light in a region where it is difficult to emit light at a light intensity higher than a predetermined level.

  Specifically, the central light emitting mechanism HA4 emits the first light emitting mechanism HA41 that causes the left peripheral region on the left end region side and the right peripheral region on the right edge region to emit light, and the second light emitting mechanism causes the front end portion of the decoration unit HA1 to emit light It has HA42 and 3rd illumination mechanism HA43 which light-emits the lower part of decoration unit HA1. In the present embodiment, although the configuration in which the first illumination mechanism HA41 causes both the left peripheral area on the left end area side and the right peripheral area on the right end area side to emit light is described, the present invention is not limited thereto. The first illumination mechanism HA41 may be configured to emit light in at least one of the left peripheral area on the left end area side and the right peripheral area on the right end area side.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: First light emitting mechanism HA41)
As also shown in FIG. 131, the first illumination mechanism HA41 has a top lens-in-a-lens substrate HA411 disposed below the approximate center of the decoration unit HA1. The central light emitting mechanism HA4 makes it difficult for the left end light emitting mechanism HA2 and the right end light emitting mechanism HA3 to guide light by guiding light emitted from the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens to the left peripheral area and the right peripheral area by the light guiding mechanism. Also in the region, light is emitted at a predetermined light intensity or more. That is, the first illumination mechanism HA41 is a top lens disposed on the top surface of the LED substrate HA411 on the top surface of the top lens and the top lens disposed to cover the bottom surface and the side surface of the LED substrate HA411. And a reflector HA412. Note that the top surface of the top lens LED substrate HA411 is covered by the top lens in the top lens of the decoration unit HA1 of FIG. 127 by the LED substrate hiding member HA16, and the top lens LED substrate hiding member HA16 reflects the light of the LED HA4111. Acts as.

  A translucent left light guiding lens HA413 and a translucent right light guiding lens for guiding light from the LED HA 4111 to the left and right upper light guiding regions and emitting light in a planar shape on the upper surface of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens An upper light guiding mechanism is provided in which the HA 414 and the top lens are arranged symmetrically with respect to the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens. Specifically, the right end portion of the horizontally disposed left light guide lens HA413 is disposed on the upper surface of the left end portion of the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA4111 can be incident from the end face of the right end portion It is done. The left light guide lens HA413 has the left end positioned above the upper left speaker device UD2, and emits light upward from the middle to the left end, thereby providing an upper light guide on the center side from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD. The area is made to emit light.

  On the other hand, the left end portion of the horizontally disposed right light guide lens HA 414 is disposed on the upper surface of the right end portion of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA 4111 can be made incident from the end face of this left end portion. The right light guide lens HA414 has a right end positioned above the upper right speaker device UD3 and emits light upward from the middle to the right end to form a center side area from the right end area of the upper door mechanism UD (upper side The light guide region is made to emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 132, the lower surface of the top lens in the LED substrate HA411 is provided with a lower light guiding mechanism for guiding light from the lower light source to the lower light guiding region and emitting light in a plane. . Specifically, the lower surface of the top lens LED substrate HA411 is provided with a plurality of lower-side light sources LEDHA4112. The left end portion of the horizontally disposed translucent right down light lens HA 415 is disposed on the lower surface of the right end portion of the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens, and the light of the LED HA 4 112 can be made incident from the end face of this left end portion There is. The right down light lens HA 415 is positioned at the right end above the upper right speaker device UD 3, and emits light downward from the center to the right end, thereby guiding the lower side from the left end region of the upper door mechanism UD to the center side. The light area is made to emit light. That is, the right down light lens HA 415 illuminates around the lower light guide area HA5 d (see FIG. 125) which is the front area of the upper right speaker device UD3 of the panel base HH, and around the non-light transmitting lower side light guide area HA5 d The light emitting element emits light by functioning as a reflector. Further, the lower light guiding mechanism has a left down light lens (not shown) having the same configuration as the right down light lens HA 415. The left down light lens and the right down light lens HA 415 are arranged symmetrically about the LED substrate HA 411 in the top lens.

(Upper door mechanism UD: top panel mechanism HA: central light emitting mechanism HA4: second light emitting mechanism HA42)
As shown in FIG. 131, the second illumination mechanism HA42 has a central on-lens LED substrate HA421 disposed below the LED substrate HA411 in the top lens. A plurality of LED HAs 4211 are provided on the top surface of the central lens top LED HA 421. The lower surface of the LED HA 4211 is covered by a central lens reflector HA 422.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the top surface of the central lens on LED substrate HA421 is covered by the top lens light guide plate base HA15. A translucent center lens A 423 is disposed below the central lens upper LED substrate HA 421. The center lens A 423 is provided such that the upper end portion is exposed from the gap between the top lens light guide plate base HA 15 and the panel base HH and the central on-lens LED substrate HA 421, and the light of the LED HA 4211 is incident from the end face of the upper end portion The light is emitted from the lower end surface formed and arranged along the lower end portion of the top lens light guide plate base HA15.

(Upper door mechanism UD: Top panel mechanism HA: Central light emitting mechanism HA4: Third light emitting mechanism HA43)
The third illumination mechanism HA43 has a central lower LED substrate HA431 disposed on the rear side of the central lens upper LED substrate HA421. The lower central LED substrate HA431 is provided such that the normal direction of the front surface substantially coincides with the front direction. A plurality of LEDs HA4311 are provided on the front of the lower central LED substrate HA431. A translucent central lower lens HA 432 is disposed in front of the central lower LED substrate HA 431. The central lower lens HA432 is provided below the panel base HH, and causes the light of the LED HA 4311 to emit light in the lower region of the decoration unit HA1.

(Upper door mechanism UD: left side panel mechanism HD, right side panel mechanism HE, left front panel mechanism HF, right front panel mechanism HG)
Hereinafter, a mechanism in which the left horizontal panel mechanism HD and the left front panel mechanism HF are integrated is referred to as a left panel mechanism HJ, and a mechanism in which the right horizontal panel mechanism HE and the right front panel mechanism HG are integrated is described as a right panel mechanism HK. The left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism HK function as light emitting units disposed on the side of the front surface of the screen mechanism D as a rendering device. The left panel mechanism HJ and the right panel mechanism K are configured symmetrically in the same manner with respect to the screen mechanism D, so only the left panel mechanism HJ will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the left panel mechanism HJ includes a partition mechanism HJ2 functioning as a partition member, an upper left side lens HJ3 functioning as a side surface light transmitting member, and a lower left lens HJ4 functioning as a front surface light transmitting member. , And the inner light guide member HJ5. The left panel mechanism HJ has a left LED substrate HJ1 as a light source device described later, and light from the left LED substrate HJ1 is emitted to the outside from the upper left side lens HJ3, the lower left lens HJ4, and the left light guide plate HJ5. Configured to be.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the left panel mechanism HJ includes an upper left side lens HJ3, a lower left lens HJ4, a partition plate HJ21 and a left LED board case HJ22 which function as a partition mechanism HJ2, and a left LED A substrate HJ1 and a left light guide plate HJ51 and a left LED substrate cover HJ52 that function as the inner light guide member HJ5 are provided.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is set such that the normal direction of the substrate surface substantially coincides with the forward direction. Four LEDs HJ11 and six LEDs HJ12 are disposed on the front surface of the left LED substrate HJ1. The LEDs HJ11 and LEDHJ12 are set to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the substrate surface. Further, on the surface of the left LED substrate HJ1 opposite to the surface on which the LEDs HJ11 and LED HJ12 are disposed, six LEDs HJ13 are disposed. The LEDs HJ 13 are set to emit light in the normal direction (rear direction) of the substrate surface.

  The left LED substrate HJ1 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction in the vertical direction, and the upper end region is formed wide in the right direction. The LEDs HJ 12 are arranged substantially uniformly in a row from the upper end to the center along the left edge in the longitudinal direction. Moreover, LEDHJ11 is arrange | positioned by one row with a space | interval wider than the said group on the straight line which inclined from the center part to the left lower end part. Moreover, LEDHJ13 is arrange | positioned substantially equally in 1 row from the central region upper end to the lower end along the right edge part of the surface on the opposite side to LEDHJ11 and LEDHJ12.

  The left LED substrate case HJ22 is a case that accommodates from the front side a left LED substrate HJ1 formed in substantially the same shape as the left LED substrate HJ1 in a front view. In the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ221 for allowing light from the LED HJ11 in the forward direction to pass through are formed at positions corresponding to the respective LEDs HJ11. Further, in the left LED substrate case HJ22, through holes HJ222 for passing light from the LED HJ12 in the forward direction are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the respective LEDs HJ12. That is, four through holes HJ 221 are arranged in a straight line, and six through holes HJ 222 are arranged in a straight line. A plane region HJ22a in which the four through holes HJ221 are formed and a plane region HJ22b in which the six through holes HJ222 are formed are bending lines extending from the center left end to the upper end of the surface of the left LED substrate case HJ22. It is divided. The flat region HJ22a is set higher in the front direction than the flat region HJ22b, and a step HJ22c is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 138, the partition HJ 21 has a chevron shape having an apex at the front end in a side view. Specifically, the partition plate HJ21 is formed in a substantially pyramid shape having the flat region HJ22b as a bottom surface. In the partition plate HJ21, the bottom surface on the flat region HJ22b side and the left side surface are open. Further, the upper wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed to reach the apex with a slope downward while the width in the left-right direction is reduced forward from the upper edge of the plane area HJ22b. Further, the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed so as to reach the apex with an inclination in the left direction while the width in the vertical direction is reduced forward. Thus, the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 is formed to be extended from the step HJ22c. That is, the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light irradiated in the forward direction from the left LED substrate HJ1 into the LED HJ11 and the LED HJ12.

  The upper left side lens HJ3 is formed in a substantially triangular flat plate shape whose peripheral shape substantially matches the open left side surface of the partition plate HJ21. That is, an inner space HJ23 to which light is emitted from the LED HJ12 is formed by the partition plate HJ21, the upper left side lens HJ3, and the left LED substrate HJ1. The upper left side lens HJ 3 is formed of a material capable of transmitting light, and constitutes a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ21 exists in the front direction of the LED HJ12. Therefore, part of the light emitted from the LED HJ12 is reflected by the partition plate HJ21. The right side wall surface of the partition plate HJ 21 is inclined, so that it is reflected to light having at least a component in the left direction. Thus, the light reflected by the partition plate HJ21 reaches the upper left side lens HJ3. The upper left side lens HJ3 is decorated such that the inner wall surface is arranged in a matrix form of square pyramids having apexes on the inside. Thus, the light reaching the upper left side lens HJ3 is irregularly refracted and transmitted to the outside. Thus, the partition mechanism HJ2 having the partition plate HJ21 and the step HJ22c can divide the light in the forward direction into two and guide the light divided into one in the side direction. Further, the upper left side lens HJ3 can transmit the light divided into one part guided by the partition structure HJ2. The partition plate HJ 21 is preferably white for increasing the reflectance, but is not limited thereto.

  The lower left lens HJ4 is disposed in front of the left LED substrate case HJ22 so as to form an inner space HJ41 with the flat region HJ22a of the left LED substrate case HJ22. The lower left lens HJ 4 is formed of a translucent material, and constitutes a part of the left side surface of the housing 2.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the front wall surface of the lower left lens HJ4 is present in front of the LED HJ11. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED HJ11 reaches the lower left lens HJ4. The lower left lens HJ4 is decorated such that the inner wall surface has a zigzag shape in a side view cross section. Thus, the light reaching the lower left lens HJ4 is irregularly refracted and transmitted to the outside. Thus, the lower left lens HJ4 can transmit light divided into the other by the partition structure HJ2. The decorative structure of the inner wall surface of the upper left side lens HJ3 and the lower left lens HJ4 is not limited to this, as long as incident light is irregularly refracted and emitted to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 140, the left light guide plate HJ51 has a light incident part HJ511, an optical path part HJ512, and a light emitting part HJ513. The left light guide plate HJ51 is formed of a translucent material. The light incident part HJ 511 is formed in a flat plate shape having a longitudinal direction at the top and bottom. The light incident portion HJ 511 has depressions at two upper and lower positions, and a protrusion HJ 511 a having a convex cross section extending in the vertical direction is provided at the center in the left-right direction of each depression. Further, the light incident part HJ 511 has a through hole HJ 511 b which extends adjacent to the left side of the protrusion HJ 511 a. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 has a shape engaged with the rear side surface of the light incident part HJ511 of the left light guide plate HJ51. The left LED substrate cover HJ52 has a protrusion HJ52a with a convex cross section extending in the vertical direction at the center in the left-right direction, and is fitted in the through hole HJ511b. The left LED substrate cover HJ 52 is formed of a non-light transmitting material.

  The protrusion HJ 511 a is provided to face the LEDs HJ 13 arranged on the left LED substrate HJ 1. The light from the LED HJ 13 is incident from the front side of the protrusion HJ 511 a. The left light guide plate HJ51 has an inclined surface HJ511c in which the incident surface is inclined approximately 45 degrees in the right direction in the traveling direction of the incident light to the protrusion HJ511a. Since the inclined surface HJ 511 c is disposed to be in contact with the left LED substrate cover HJ 52, light incident on the protrusion HJ 511 a is reflected by the inclined surface HJ 511 c and then travels to the right. The light traveled to the right passes through the optical path HJ 512 and reaches the light emitter HJ 513. The optical path portion HJ 512 is formed to be bent backward from the right end portion of the light incident portion HJ 511. The optical path portion HJ 512 is set such that the normal direction is the right front direction. The light emitting unit HJ 513 is formed to be bent from the right end of the light path unit HJ 512. The light emitting unit HJ 513 is set such that the normal direction is the right front direction. In addition, the light emitting unit HJ 513 is decorated in a zigzag shape in cross section in the front view at the right end. As a result, the light that has reached the right end of the light emitting unit HJ 513 is irregularly refracted, and is irradiated to the front surface of the screen mechanism D or the like.

(Upper door mechanism UD: upper left panel mechanism HB, upper right panel mechanism HC)
Hereinafter, since the upper left panel mechanism HB and the upper right panel mechanism HC are configured symmetrically in the same manner with respect to each other, only the upper left panel mechanism HB will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the upper left panel mechanism HB is fitted into a substantially triangular gap formed between the upper left end of the panel base HH and the left rear end of the top lens cover HA11 of the top panel mechanism HA. Will be placed. The upper left panel mechanism HB has an upper surface portion HB1 having a substantially right triangular shape having a right angle to the front left corner in top view and having an enlarged width in the left-right direction from the rear end to the front end. A tight screw HH4 can be screwed from the rear to the upper left end of the panel base HH. The tight screw HH4 protrudes to the front of the panel base HH and is capable of being fitted to the upper left panel mechanism HB.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a fitting portion HB11 at the rear end, and a tight screw HH4 is fitted. Further, the upper left panel mechanism HB has a frame portion HB2 formed to be lowered downward from the left front end. The frame portion HB2 has, at its lower end, a restricting portion HB21 that protrudes rearward and is bent downward. When the upper left panel mechanism HB is attached to the panel base HH, the restricting portion HB21 extends to the rear position of the fitting portion HH3 of the panel base HH engaged with the frame portion HB2. That is, since the restricting portion HB21 exists at the rear position of the fitting portion HH3, movement in the forward direction is restricted. The frame portion HB2 is decorated such that the inner wall surface is in the form of an array of triangular pyramids that project inward, and enables the light from the light source from behind to be irregularly refracted.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the upper left panel mechanism HB has locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 are disposed adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 on the front side of the fitting portion HH3 and have a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11, and from the placement location to the top lens cover HA11. It is formed to project in the direction of heading. Specifically, the locking piece HB12 is located in the rear end region of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes in the right direction substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB13 is located substantially at the center of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes in the right rear direction at an angle of about 45 degrees with the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking piece HB14 is located at the front end of the right edge of the fitting portion HB11, and protrudes in the right direction substantially perpendicular to the fitting direction of the fitting portion HB11. The locking pieces HB12, HB13, and HB14 protrude from a position below the outer surface of the top surface portion HB1.

  On the other hand, the top lens cover HA11 is formed with notches HA111, HA112, HA113 in a shape engaged with the locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14. The notches HA111, HA112, and HA113 are notches formed on the inner wall surface of the top lens cover HA11. Adjacent to the top lens cover HA11 in a state in which the locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14 are engaged with the notched portions HA111, HA112, HA113, tight screws HH4 are fitted to the fitting portions HB11 via the panel base HH. By combining the upper left panel mechanism HB, the movement in the horizontal direction is restricted by the panel base HH and the top lens cover HA11. Further, the forward movement of the upper left panel mechanism HB is restricted by the restricting portion HB21.

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described above. The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above has the following features.
(1-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) capable of moving the inside of the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) relative to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) A driving force transmission mechanism (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from (the driving motor E25);
In the arm (crank member E22), the pin (slide member E26) moves in the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) to move the pin receiving portion (slide groove) via the pin (slide member E26). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22) while operating in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to E22b), and the first position (front standby) Position) and the second position (front exposure position),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts moving from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposed position) from the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26), and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is moved from the second position (front exposed position) to the It is formed along a direction in which the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26) when the movement toward the first position (the front standby position) is started. There is.

(1-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (a slide member E26) capable of sliding the inside of the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) via a motor (slide member E26) A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25);
The arm (crank member E22) slides the slide groove (slide member E26) through the slide member (slide member E26) as the slide member (slide member E26) slides inside the slide groove (slide groove E22b). The display unit (front screen mechanism E1) operates in conjunction with the operation of the arm (crank member E22) at a first position (front) while interlocking with the transmission of the driving force to the groove E22b). Operation between the standby position) and the second position (front exposure position),
The slide groove (slide groove E22b) is a point at which the display means (front screen mechanism E1) starts operating from the first position (front standby position) to the second position (front exposed position). The movement direction of the slide member (slide member E26) and the display means (front screen mechanism E1) move from the second position (front exposure position) toward the first position (front standby position) A groove wall surface (groove wall surface E22b1) is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member (slide member E26) at the time of start.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the slide groove E22b is a moving direction of the slide member E26 at the time when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position to the front exposed position, and the front screen The groove wall surface E22b1 is formed so as to be substantially parallel to the moving direction of the slide member E26 when the mechanism E1 starts operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position. Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 moves from the front exposure position to the front When the operation toward the standby position is started, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member.

  Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 Operation can be made mild. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 can be driven smoothly, and the load on the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 and the drive motor E25 from being damaged. In addition, since the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven without devising the output of pulses, there is no need to perform complicated excitation control, and the control load related to the drive of the front screen mechanism E1 can be reduced. be able to.

  In addition, when it is necessary to perform excitation control to drive the front screen mechanism E1 smoothly, it is necessary to change the design of the excitation control, for example, when the size of the front screen mechanism E1 is changed. Takes time and effort. In this respect, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, since the front screen mechanism E1 can be smoothly driven without performing the excitation control, such a labor does not occur, and the front It is possible to easily cope with the change of the specifications such as the size of the screen mechanism E1.

  In the embodiment described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 starts its operation from the front standby position toward the front exposed position, the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member E26, and the front screen mechanism E1 is front It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the slide groove E22b via the slide member when the movement from the exposed position toward the front standby position is started. That is, the slide occurs when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position and when the front screen mechanism E1 starts the operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position It has been described that the driving force is not transmitted to the groove E22b. However, in the present invention, when the front screen mechanism starts the operation from the front standby position toward the front exposure position, and when the front screen mechanism starts the operation from the front exposure position toward the front standby position The drive force may not be transmitted to the slide groove.

  Here, the position of the pin (relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) when the display means is at the first position is referred to as a first predetermined position, and the display means is at the second position. The position of the pin (the relative position with respect to the pin receiving portion) is referred to as a second predetermined position. In this case, the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion corresponds to the moving direction of the pin at the time when the display means starts to move from the first position to the second position (the pin is not And the second predetermined position on the pin receiving portion is the moving direction of the pin at the time when the display means starts to move from the second position to the first position. It may be formed along (the direction in which the pin actually moves, regardless of the pin receiving portion). The first predetermined position and the second predetermined position may be the same position or different positions.

  Furthermore, the driving force transmission mechanism includes a driving force transmission body (for example, a gear) that rotates about a first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source, and the pin is fixed to the driving force transmission body It may be The first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is formed in a direction perpendicular to the pin connecting the first straight position and the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (for example, the center of the gear). The second predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is a direction perpendicular to the pin at the second predetermined position and the straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (for example, the center of the gear) It may be formed in

  Thereby, the direction of the first predetermined position in the pin receiving portion is the direction in which the pin tends to move when the display means starts the operation from the first position to the second position (concentric with the driving force transfer member And the tangent direction of the circle whose radius is the distance between the center of the driving force transmitter and the pin at the first predetermined position), and the second predetermined position of the pin receiving portion Direction to move the pin from the position of 1 to the first position (a circle concentric with the driving force transmitting body, the center of the driving force transmitting body and the pin at the second predetermined position) And the tangent direction of the circle with the radius of Therefore, when the display means starts to move from the first position to the second position, no driving force is transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and the display means starts from the second position to the first position. The driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiver via the pin when starting the operation toward the. Thus, when the display means is in the vicinity of the first position and the second position, the operation of the display means can be made gentle.

  The object driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

A drive mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed in the arm via a pin movable in the inside of the pin receiving portion;
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is Operate between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the movement of the arm;
When the movable body starts to move from the first position toward the second position, the pin receiving portion does not transmit the driving force to the pin receiving portion via the pin, and thus the movable body is movable. Is formed along a direction in which the driving force is not transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin when the movement from the second position toward the first position is started,
A drive mechanism characterized by

A drive mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
A driving force transmission mechanism for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to a pin receiving portion formed in the arm via a pin movable in the inside of the pin receiving portion;
The arm operates in conjunction with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion via the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion, while the movable body is Operate between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the movement of the arm;
The pin receiving portion is a moving direction of the pin at the time when the movable body starts to move from the first position to the second position, and the movable body is movable from the second position to the second position. It is formed along the moving direction of the pin at the time of starting the operation toward the position of 1,
A drive mechanism characterized by

(2-1) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) capable of moving the inside of the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) relative to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) And (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from (driving motor E25),
The driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) rotates around a first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source (driving motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the drive force transmission body (crank gear E21),
The arm (crank member E22) moves the inside of the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) by the pin (slide member E26) moving along with the rotation of the driving force transfer member (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) includes the arm (crank, while it rotates in conjunction with transmission of the driving force to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26). Interlocking with the rotation of the member E22) to rotate between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) in the direction of the straight line connecting the intersection point with (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) may be used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). Direction of force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposed position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) in the direction of the straight line connecting the intersection point with the (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) may be used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). The direction of the force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22).

(2-2) A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2),
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (a slide member E26) capable of sliding the inside of the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) via a motor (slide member E26) A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25);
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates in accordance with the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21),
In the arm (crank member E22), the slide member (slide member E26) slides along the inside of the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the gear (crank gear E21) rotates. The display means (front screen mechanism E1) includes the arm (crank member E22) while rotating in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via (slide member E26). Interlockingly with the rotation of) between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22) And a straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting an intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and an eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) are substantially orthogonal to each other.

(3-1) Drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
And a housing (screen housing C10) for housing the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A power source is provided via a pin (slide member E26) capable of moving the inside of the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) relative to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) And (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from (driving motor E25),
The driving force transmitting body (crank gear E21) rotates around a first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source (driving motor E25),
The pin (slide member E26) is fixed to the drive force transmission body (crank gear E21),
The arm (crank member E22) moves the inside of the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) by the pin (slide member E26) moving along with the rotation of the driving force transfer member (crank gear E21). The display means (front screen mechanism E1) includes the arm (crank, while it rotates in conjunction with transmission of the driving force to the pin receiving portion (slide groove E22b) via the pin (slide member E26). Interlocking with the rotation of the member E22) to rotate between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position) in the direction of the straight line connecting the intersection point with (the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) may be used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). Direction of force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
The pin (slide member E26) when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposed position), and the first straight line and the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) The display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) in the direction of the straight line connecting the intersection point with the (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b). In this case, the display means (front screen mechanism E1) or the arm (crank) may be used to rotate the display means (front screen mechanism E1) regardless of the driving force generated from the power source (drive motor E25). Direction of force applied to the pin (slide member E26) when applied to the member E22),
Openings (operation openings C21 and C31) are provided at positions where the driving force transmission body (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated in the housing portion (screen housing C10).

(III-2) a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving a display means (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projection means (projector mechanism B2);
A drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10) that accommodates the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) therein;
A main body (cabinet G) for housing the drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10);
And an open / close door (upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be able to open and close.
The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2)
An arm (crank member E22) connected to the display means (front screen mechanism E1);
A motor (a slide member E26) capable of sliding the inside of the slide groove (slide groove E22b) with respect to a slide groove (slide groove E22b) formed in the arm (crank member E22) via a motor (slide member E26) A gear (crank gear E21) for transmitting the driving force generated from the driving motor E25);
The gear (crank gear E21) rotates in accordance with the driving force generated from the motor (drive motor E25),
The slide member (slide member E26) is fixed to the gear (crank gear E21),
In the arm (crank member E22), the slide member (slide member E26) slides along the inside of the slide groove (slide groove E22b) as the gear (crank gear E21) rotates. The display means (front screen mechanism E1) includes the arm (crank member E22) while rotating in conjunction with the transmission of the driving force to the slide groove (slide groove E22b) via (slide member E26). Interlockingly with the rotation of) between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position),
When the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position (front standby position), and when the display means (front screen mechanism E1) is at the second position (front exposure position) A straight line connecting the rotation center of the gear (crank gear E21) and the slide member (slide member E26) (a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b), and the arm (crank member E22) And the straight line connecting the slide member (slide member E26) (the straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21) is substantially orthogonal,
The drive mechanism casing (screen casing C10) is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) at positions where the gear (crank gear E21) can be manually rotated.

(3-3) The openings (operation openings C21 and C31) are first openings (for operation) provided on one side surface (right side plate C2) of the drive mechanism housing (screen housing C10) A second opening (operation) provided in the side (left plate C3) facing the one side (right side plate C2) of the opening C21) and the side of the drive mechanism casing (screen case C10) And an opening C31),
The first opening (operation opening C21) and the second opening (operation opening C31) are formed to have substantially the same size and substantially the same shape.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposure position, the crank gear E21 is eccentric to the rotation center position E21a. A straight line connecting the position E21b and a straight line connecting the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 are substantially orthogonal to each other.

  Thus, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposure position, the force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) is used as the front screen (without manual intervention) regardless of the driving force generated from the drive motor E25. When applied to the mechanism E1 or the crank member E22, the direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of a straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b. Therefore, the force applied to the slide member E26 is not converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21 (from the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 and the eccentric position E21b) If it is slightly deviated, it is converted into a force for rotating the crank gear E21). Therefore, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated by moving the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22 by hand when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 is It does not rotate. As a result, it is possible to prevent a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 from directly touching the front screen mechanism E1 and forcibly moving the front screen mechanism E1.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, in order to prevent the front screen mechanism E1 from manually rotating when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposure position, There is no need to separately add a member or the like for locking the rotation of the front screen mechanism E1, and the cost can be prevented from increasing.

  Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the front screen drive mechanism E2 is housed inside the screen housing C10, and the crank housing E10 is manually rotated by the screen housing C10. The operation openings C21 and C31 are provided at possible positions. Therefore, a person who handles the front screen mechanism E1 can rotate the front screen mechanism E1 by manually rotating the crank gear E21 from the operation openings C21 and C31. Therefore, although the front screen mechanism E1 can not be rotated by directly touching the front screen mechanism E1, convenience is deteriorated because a means for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 is additionally secured. Can be prevented. In addition, when the front screen mechanism E1 is rotated through manual rotation of the crank gear E21, since the front screen mechanism E1 is not directly touched, a large load is applied to the front screen mechanism E1. The risk of damaging the screen mechanism E1 can be reduced.

  Further, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the screen casing C10 is provided with openings (operation openings C21 and C31) of substantially the same size and substantially the same shape on the pair of side surfaces. It is possible to carry the screen housing C10 by hooking hands on the two openings. Thus, the operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and according to the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the crank gear E21 is manually rotated from the opening as the handles. The front screen mechanism E1 can be pivoted.

  In the embodiment described above, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position or the front exposure position, a force for rotating the front screen mechanism E1 (manually) regardless of the driving force generated from the drive motor E25. The direction of the force applied to the slide member E26 coincides with the direction of the straight line connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21 when the front screen mechanism E1 or the crank member E22 is applied. As described. That is, it has been described that the front screen mechanism E1 is not manually pivoted (locked) both when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position and in the front exposure position. However, in the present invention, the front screen mechanism may not be manually pivoted (locked) only when the front screen mechanism is in the front standby position or in the front exposed position. .

  The object driven by the drive mechanism is not particularly limited, and the drive mechanism may be the following drive mechanism.

A drive mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
And a driving force transmission body for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to the pin receiving portion formed in the arm via a pin movable in the inside of the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates about a first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting body,
The arm is interlocked with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion through the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting member. While pivoting, the movable body pivots between a first position and a second position in conjunction with the pivoting of the arm,
The direction of the pin connecting the movable body when the movable body is at the first position, and the straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body is that the movable body is at the first position In this case, the direction of the force applied to the pin when the force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm regardless of the driving force generated from the power source,
The direction of the pin connecting the movable body when the movable body is at the second position, and the straight line connecting the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmission body is that the movable body is at the second position In this case, the direction of the force applied to the pin when the force for rotating the movable body is applied to the movable body or the arm regardless of the driving force generated from the power source.
A drive mechanism characterized by

A drive mechanism for driving the movable body,
An arm connected to the movable body;
And a driving force transmission body for transmitting a driving force generated from a power source to the pin receiving portion formed in the arm via a pin movable in the inside of the pin receiving portion,
The driving force transmitting body rotates about a first straight line according to the driving force generated from the power source,
The pin is fixed to the driving force transmitting body,
The arm is interlocked with the driving force being transmitted to the pin receiving portion through the pin by the pin moving inside the pin receiving portion with the rotation of the driving force transmitting member. While pivoting around a second straight line, the movable body pivots between a first position and a second position in conjunction with the pivoting of the arm;
When the movable body is at the first position, and when the movable body is at the second position, the first straight line intersects with the driving force transfer body, and the straight line connecting the pins The intersection point of the second straight line and the arm and the straight line connecting the pins are orthogonal to each other;
A drive mechanism characterized by

  Note that the first straight line and the second straight line may be parallel, and in that case, a view as seen from the direction of the first straight line (the direction of the second straight line) (for example, a side view of the drive mechanism) At the intersection of the first straight line and the driving force transmitter and the straight line connecting the pins (for example, the straight line connecting the center of the gear to the pin) and the second straight line and the straight line connecting the arm (eg, The straight line connecting the rotation center of the arm and the pin may be orthogonal to each other.

(4-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable / closable and allows visual display of an image displayed by the display unit And UD),
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image;
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on the light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) Different second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
A screen casing (screen casing C10) for housing the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D);
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D), and the screen casing (screen casing C10) is unitized, and
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to be between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position). Operate with
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is disposed behind the second position (front exposed position), and the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the second position (front exposed position). , The image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) while the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is at the first position. When in the (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has lower brightness than the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the two screens of the front screen mechanism E1 and the fixed screen mechanism D are accommodated in the screen housing C10. The front screen mechanism E1 operates between the front standby position and the front exposure position by being driven by the front screen drive mechanism E2, and the fixed screen mechanism D is disposed behind the front exposure position. When the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front exposure position, an image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, while when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position, the projector mechanism B2 is projected The fixed image is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D.

  Therefore, when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the front screen mechanism E1, the position of the front screen mechanism E1 and the fixed screen when the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D When the position of the mechanism D is compared, the fixed screen mechanism D is located behind the screen housing C10 than the front screen mechanism E1.

  Here, the back side of the screen housing C10 is more affected by diffuse reflection due to the light reflected by the wall of the screen housing C10, so the fixed screen mechanism D is more so-called white than the front screen mechanism E1. It is easy for blur to occur. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, the lightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is made lower than the lightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent white blurring of the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, and it is possible to improve the definition of the image.

(4-2) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable / closable and allows visual display of an image displayed by the display unit And UD),
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image;
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) backward;
A first screen (front screen mechanism E1) having one display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3);
And a second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) having a plurality of display surfaces capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3). ,
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) are configured as a unit. Yes,
The first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) to be between the first position (front standby position) and the second position (front exposed position). Operate with
When the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) On the other hand, when the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is the second screen (fixed screen mechanism) Displayed on D)
The second screen (fixed screen mechanism D) has lower brightness than the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) and the second screen (fixed screen mechanism D).

  According to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the front screen mechanism E1 has one display surface, and the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces. Since the fixed screen mechanism D has a plurality of display surfaces, the influence of diffuse reflection due to light reflection between the display surfaces is large, and so-called white blur is likely to occur. The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above In the above, the lightness of the fixed screen mechanism D is made lower than the lightness of the front screen mechanism E1. As a result, it is possible to prevent white blurring of the image displayed on the fixed screen mechanism D, and it is possible to improve the definition of the image.

  In the present invention, a first screen whose display surface is perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light and a second screen whose display surface is not perpendicular to the optical axis of the irradiation light are provided. It may be lower than the brightness of the first screen. Also in this case, it is possible to prevent white blur of the image displayed on the second screen.

(5-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image, and a screen (front screen mechanism E1) having a display surface capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) A display unit (display unit A) configured by being unitized,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
An open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) which is attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable / closable and allows the screen (front screen mechanism E1) to be visible. Equipped with
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) has a first member (front screen member E11) having the display surface (projection surface E11a), and a second (second pattern surface E12b) provided with a convex portion. Of the first member (front screen member E11) and a surface of the first member (front screen member E11) opposite to the display surface (projection surface E11a) and the second member (front screen support E12). ) And the surface on the opposite side to the provided surface (the second pattern surface E12b) of the convex portion is fixed so as to be in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the front screen mechanism E1 includes the front screen member E11 having the projection surface E11a and the front screen support E12 having the second pattern surface E12b in the front screen member E11. It is formed by being fixed so that the surface on the opposite side to the projection surface E11a and the surface on the opposite side to the second pattern surface E12b in the front screen support E12 may be brought into contact with each other. As described above, since the member having the projection surface E11a and the member having the second pattern surface E12b are configured as separate members, in the process of forming the front screen mechanism E1, due to the convex portion of the second pattern surface E12b As a result, a sink mark is formed on the projection surface E11a, and a decrease in the accuracy as a screen is prevented. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(5-2) The surface (second pattern surface E12b) provided with the convex portion in the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is decorated with unevenness.
The screen (front screen mechanism E1) operates between a first position (front standby position) and a second position (front exposed position) by being driven by a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2). Do,
When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position), an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) is displayed on the screen (front screen mechanism E1), When the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the first position (front standby position), the screen (front screen mechanism E1) is applied to the surface provided with the convex portion (second pattern surface E12b). The decoration is arranged so as to be visible through the display area (upper display window UD1).

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 is a second pattern surface E12b (a surface opposite to the projection surface E11a, that is, the screen The decoration applied to the back surface is arranged so as to be visible through the upper display window UD1. Therefore, if the decoration is not provided, the back surface of the front screen mechanism E1 is directly viewed from the player when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the front standby position. In this case, the aesthetics of the gaming machine are significantly impaired, which is undesirable. From such a viewpoint, in the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the back of the front screen mechanism E1 is to be decorated.

  However, when such a decorated front screen mechanism E1 is integrally formed, a sink mark is formed on the projection surface E11a of the front screen mechanism E1 due to the convex portion constituting the decoration, and the accuracy as a screen is increased. It will decrease. In view of this point, in the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, the member having the projection surface E11 and the member having the decorated surface are configured as separate members, and both members are fixed to each other. The front screen mechanism E1 is formed. Thereby, a sink mark is formed on the projection surface E11 due to the decoration, and the accuracy as the screen is prevented from being reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment described above, it is possible to display an image on a screen with good accuracy.

(6-1) A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image and a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) A display configured by unitizing a screen mechanism F1) and a screen case (screen case C10) for housing the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) Unit (display unit A),
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
A display area (upper display window UD1) is provided that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body (cabinet G) and can visually recognize the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) With the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD),
And a porous plate (porous plate B15) in which a plurality of holes are formed,
The porous plate (porous plate B15) is disposed such that the projector (projector mechanism B2) is difficult to visually recognize through the display area (upper display window UD1), and the plurality of holes A space in which the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is housed in the screen casing (screen casing C10) with the perforated plate B15) as a boundary, and the projector (projector (projector) A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space in which the mechanism B2) is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 in the screen housing C10 are accommodated by the plurality of holes formed in the perforated plate B15. A passage through which air can flow is formed between the space and the space where the projector mechanism B2 is disposed. Therefore, the space (the area opened for projecting the image) in the screen housing C10 can be used for heat dissipation, so that the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2 can be efficiently released. it can. In addition, since the porous plate B15 is arranged such that the projector mechanism B2 is difficult to visually recognize through the upper display window UD1 provided in the upper door mechanism UD, it is difficult for the player to see the projector mechanism B2 and the projector mechanism B2 This makes it possible to prevent the appearance of the gaming machine from being impaired by the appearance of.

(6-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) erected on the screen casing (screen casing C10), while light is emitted forward. It is possible to irradiate,
The gaming machine further includes:
The projector further comprises a reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) disposed in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) such that light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) can be reflected obliquely downward and backward.
The porous plate (porous plate B15) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D) so as to cover the lower surface of the projector (projector mechanism B2).

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided upright on the screen housing C10, and the projector mechanism B2 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D. Therefore, a relatively wide space is expanded below the projector mechanism B2. The perforated plate B15 is disposed above the fixed screen mechanism D so as to cover the lower surface of the projector mechanism B2. Therefore, since the relatively wide space can be used for heat dissipation, it is possible to more efficiently release the heat generated by the projector mechanism B2.

(7-1) A display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
A main body (cabinet G) that accommodates the display unit (display unit A) and has an opening on the front surface;
And an open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable / closable.
The display unit (display unit A)
A projector (projector mechanism B2) capable of projecting an image;
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) for reflecting light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2);
Screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector mechanism B2) based on light reflected by the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) And
The projector (projector mechanism B2), the reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are configured as a unit,
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can adjust the position from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the open / close door (upper door mechanism UD) opened.

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display unit A includes the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1. The mirror mechanism B3 can adjust the position from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD open. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted, so the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(7-2) The projector (projector mechanism B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A). ,
While the projector (projector mechanism B2) is disposed above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), it is possible to emit light forward.
The reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is disposed in front of the projector (projector mechanism B2) so as to be able to reflect light emitted from the projector (projector mechanism B2) obliquely downward to the rear, and the main body It is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light by changing the degree of screwing of the screw exposed toward the opening side of the portion (cabinet G).

  According to the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the reflection direction of light, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the gaming machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw while the upper door mechanism UD is open. It can be adjusted. Thereby, even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the embodiment described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

  In the embodiment described above, the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other game machines (for example, pachinko machines, slot machines, etc.) .

(8-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiated light device B) for projecting an image;
The first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each being out of the projection range of the projector, and different from one another for each of the screens A first position operable between a position (front standby position and reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position and reel exposed position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector And a second screen,
Driving means for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position (front screen mechanism E1 · reel screen driving mechanism F2 and main control Substrate MS),
Detection of whether the first screen is at the first position (front standby position), detection of whether the first screen is at the second position (front exposure position); And detection means (sensor mechanism CS) for detecting whether or not the second screen is present at the first position (reel standby position).
The operation range between the first position and the second position of each of the first and second screens includes, in part, an overlapping range overlapping each other, and the first and second positions. Said second position of each of said screens is in said overlap range in said operating range,
The driving means is
When performing a return operation for returning each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
The first and second screens are driven in accordance with the driving procedures of the first and second screens according to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device capable of performing rendering by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform powerful effects which can not be obtained only by the image etc. displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, in order to further enhance the rendering effect, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Although the space inside the gaming machine is limited, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, in the case of overlapping the operation ranges of the movable bodies, when the plurality of movable bodies are operated at the same time, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come in contact (interference) with each other. Usually, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, when the movable body is not normally operated or when the movable body is manually moved during power off, etc., the movable body is not considered to be in such an abnormal condition. There is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other when operating the. And when movable bodies contacted, there existed a possibility that a presentation apparatus might be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection means is different according to the position of each of the first and second screens. Also, the first position of each of the first and second screens is at a different position. For this reason, when the detection means detects that one screen is at the first position, no interference occurs even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning one screen to the home position after returning the other screen to the home position first, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. Also, since it is possible to place only one of the first and second screens in the second position, the detection means detects that the first screen is in the second position. In this case, the second screen will not exist in the second position. In this case, by returning the second screen to the home position first and then returning the first screen to the home position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, in the return operation, the screens interfere with each other by driving the first and second screens according to the driving procedure according to the positions of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection unit. It becomes possible to return to each origin position without. As a result, interference between the screens can be reliably prevented by appropriately driving the first and second screens in the processing after the return operation.

(8-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) respectively corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), the corresponding screens being in the first position (front) Two first sensors for detecting the presence or absence of the standby position and the reel standby position);
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), for detecting whether the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). And a second sensor,
The driving means (main control board MS) is
The first sensor detecting that the first screen is in the first position, and the second sensor being that the first screen is in the second position If it is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, the first sensor detects the presence of the first screen in the first position because the first screen is not simultaneously present in the first position and the second position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is at the second position, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

(9-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiated light device B) for projecting an image;
The first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, each being out of the projection range of the projector, and different from one another for each of the screens A first position operable between a position (front standby position and reel standby position) and a second position (front exposure position and reel exposed position) within the projection range of the projector and to be projected by the projector And a second screen,
Driving means for driving the first and second screens independently between the first position and the second position (front screen mechanism E1 · reel screen driving mechanism F2 and main control Substrate MS),
Detection of whether or not the first screen (front screen mechanism E1) is present at the first position (front standby position), the first screen is present at the second position (front exposed position) Detection means (sensor mechanism CS) for performing detection of whether or not the second screen (reel screen mechanism F1) exists at the first position (reel exposure position); , And
The operating range of each of the first and second screens partially includes an overlapping range overlapping each other, and the second position of each of the first and second screens is in the operating range. Exist in the overlapping range,
The driving means is
When performing a return operation for returning each of the first and second screens to an origin position existing in a range excluding the overlapping range in the operation range,
A first condition in which the detection means detects that the first screen is present in either the first position or the second position, and the second screen If at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at the first position is satisfied,
Driving the first and second screens according to the driving procedure of the first and second screens according to the position of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means,
When neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied,
One of the first and second screens is driven to return to the home position, and then one of the first and second screens is detected by the detection means. The other screen is driven to return to the home position according to the driving procedure according to the detection result as to whether or not it is at the first position.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device capable of performing rendering by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform powerful effects which can not be obtained only by the image etc. displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, in order to further enhance the rendering effect, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Although the space inside the gaming machine is limited, it is possible to provide a plurality of movable bodies by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body. Here, in the case of overlapping the operation ranges of the movable bodies, when the plurality of movable bodies are operated at the same time, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come in contact (interference) with each other. Usually, appropriate control is performed so that such interference does not occur. However, when the movable body is not normally operated or when the movable body is manually moved during power off, etc., the movable body is not considered to be in such an abnormal condition. There is a possibility that the movable bodies interfere with each other when operating the. And when movable bodies contacted, there existed a possibility that a presentation apparatus might be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the detection result of the detection means is different according to the position of each of the first and second screens. Also, the first position of each of the first and second screens is at a different position. For this reason, when the detection means detects that one screen is at the first position, no interference occurs even if the other screen is driven. Therefore, by returning one screen to the home position after returning the other screen to the home position first, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. Also, since it is possible to place only one of the first and second screens in the second position, the detection means detects that the first screen is in the second position. In this case, the second screen will not exist in the second position. In this case, by returning the second screen to the home position first and then returning the first screen to the home position, the return operation can be performed without interference between the screens. As described above, the first condition in which the detection means detects that the first screen is present at either the first position or the second position, and the detection means corresponds to the second screen. In the case where at least one of the second conditions for detecting the presence at position 1 is satisfied, the driving procedure according to the position of each of the first and second screens based on the detection result of the detection means is performed By driving the first and second screens, it is possible to return to the respective origin positions without interference between the screens.

  On the other hand, when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first screen is located between the first position and the second position, and The two screens are located at positions other than the second position. Also, in this case, with the operation of one screen, the other screen may operate. Therefore, according to the invention of (1), first, after returning one screen to the origin position, according to the detection result as to whether or not another screen is present at the first position by the detection means. Return the other screen to the home position according to the driving procedure. As a result, even when neither the first condition nor the second condition is satisfied, the first and second screens can be reliably returned to the origin position.

(9-2) The detection means (sensor mechanism CS)
Two first sensors (sensor CS1 and sensor CS3) respectively corresponding to the first and second screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1), the corresponding screens being in the first position (front) Two first sensors for detecting the presence or absence of the standby position and the reel standby position);
A second sensor corresponding to the first screen (front screen mechanism E1), for detecting whether the corresponding first screen is present at the second position (front exposure position). And a second sensor,
The driving means (main control board MS) is
The first sensor detecting that the first screen is in the first position, and the second sensor being that the first screen is in the second position If it is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  According to the above configuration, the first sensor detects the presence of the first screen in the first position because the first screen is not simultaneously present in the first position and the second position. If the second sensor detects that the first screen is at the second position, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred.

(10-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiated light device B) for projecting an image;
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) fixed to a predetermined position of the display unit and capable of being a projection target of the projector;
The second and third screens (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) that can be projected by the projector, and the first position where each is out of the projection range of the projector (front standby position and reel Different times between a standby position) and a second position (front exposure position / reel exposure position) to be projected by the projector in front of the first screen and instead of the first screen. Second and third screens capable of pivoting about the motion axes (rotation center axis FG and rotation center axis RG);
And a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second and third screens independently between the first position and the second position. Equipped with
The operation ranges between the first position and the second position in each of the second and third screens partially overlap each other,
The rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is above the rotation axis (rotation center axis RG) of the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1) Yes,
In the first position (front standby position), the second screen is disposed above the first screen and out of the operation range of the third screen,
In the first position (reel standby position), the third screen is disposed at a position behind the first screen and outside the operation range of the second screen.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device capable of performing rendering by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform powerful effects which can not be obtained only by the image etc. displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, in order to further enhance the rendering effect, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device having a plurality of movable bodies has been proposed. Since the space inside the gaming machine is limited, space saving is required when providing a plurality of movable bodies, but by limiting the size of each movable body or overlapping the operation range of each movable body, A plurality of movable bodies can be provided. Here, in the case of overlapping the operation ranges of the movable bodies, when the plurality of movable bodies are operated at the same time, there is a possibility that the movable bodies come in contact (interference) with each other. And when movable bodies contacted, there existed a possibility that a presentation apparatus might be damaged.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the second screen and the third screen are pivoted to different pivot axes. This makes it possible to reduce the overlapping range of the operating range of the second screen and the operating range of the third screen. Also, the pivoting axis of the second screen is disposed above the pivoting axis of the third screen, and the second screen is disposed above the first screen in the first position. As a result, the operating range between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the third screen behind the first screen in the first position, when the third screen is arranged in the first position, the second screen The possibility of contact can be eliminated. According to the above, it is possible to efficiently arrange the three screens in the gaming machine while reducing the possibility of the three screens contacting each other.

(10-2) The drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2)
The driving of the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is performed on condition that the third screen (reel screen mechanism F1) is at the first position (reel standby position),
The driving of the third screen is performed on the condition that the second screen is in the first position (front standby position).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the second screen and the third screen can be reliably prevented from coming in contact with each other.

  (10-3) Each of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) is a projection on which the image irradiated from the projector (the irradiation light device B) is projected The shapes of the faces are different from one another.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shapes of the projection planes of the first to third screens are different from each other, even if the same image is emitted from the projector, the images are displayed in different modes for each screen It is possible to diversify the effects.

(10-4) The projection plane in any one screen (reel screen mechanism F1) of the first to third screens (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) When it becomes a projection object of a projector, it is an arc surface which becomes an arc shape convex on the upstream side in the irradiation direction of the light irradiated from the projector (irradiation light device B) in side view,
The projection plane in any one of the first to third screens (front screen mechanism E1) is a flat surface.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to represent different types of video images between the screen mechanism whose projection surface is an arc surface and the screen mechanism whose projection surface is a flat surface.

(11-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiated light device B) for projecting an image;
A movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be a projection target of the projector, a first position (front standby position) that is outside the projection range of the projector, and a second position (a projection position) of the projector A movable screen operable between the front exposure position) and
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2) for driving the movable screen between the first position and the second position;
The drive mechanism is
Motor (drive motor E25),
A shaft (shaft member E3) that is rotated by driving the motor;
Two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23) provided at both ends of the shaft and rotating with the shaft;
Two arms (crank members E22 and E22) that are connected to the two gears and are rotated about a rotation axis along a predetermined direction by rotating the two gears, the movable members being movable Two arms connected to both ends of the screen in the predetermined direction,
The movable screen rotates between the first position and the second position in conjunction with the rotation of the two arms around the rotation axis (rotation center axis FG). .

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine provided with a rendering device capable of performing rendering by rotating a movable body around an axis (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685). According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform powerful effects which can not be obtained only by the image etc. displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, in order to further enhance the rendering effect, it has been proposed to switch between a state in which display means such as a liquid crystal display device is shielded by a movable body and a state opened (exposed) before and after the movable body rotates. There is. As a result, it is possible to create a sense of unity between the movement of the movable body and the visual recognition state of the additional object such as the display means, and it is possible to perform a variety of effects. However, in the case where a display means or the like (separate object) is provided together with the movable body, there is a problem that the pivot shaft of the movable body interferes with the arrangement of the display means or the like. In this respect, it is also conceivable to prevent the arrangement of the separate part from being hindered by providing the rotational axis of the movable body above, below, to the side of the separate part, etc. In this case, Since the axis is disposed toward the end, the range of rotation of the movable body is limited, and the size of the movable body is also restricted.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the shaft is not used as a pivot of the screen (two arms). As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the shaft is increased, so that it is possible to arrange the shaft so as not to disturb the arrangement of the separate item. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the placement of the separate item while maintaining the rotation range and size of the screen to a desired degree. Also, each of the two arms is rotated with the rotation of two gears connected to both ends of the shaft. Therefore, the drive force of the motor can be equally transmitted to each of the two arms by this shaft. As a result, it is possible to prevent the concentration of the driving load on one of the arms.

  (11-2) The motor (drive motor E25) is connected to one of the two gears (intermediate gears E23 and E23), and transmits the driving force to the one gear to rotate. By rotating the shaft (shaft member E3), the shaft is rotated.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the motor is connected to the gear provided at either end of the shaft, and the motor does not disturb the arrangement of the separate part (fixed screen mechanism etc.) Can be placed near the end of the shaft. As a result, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the extras.

(11-3) It further comprises a fixed screen (fixed screen mechanism D) fixed to a predetermined position of the display unit (display unit A) and capable of being a projection target of the projector (irradiated light device B),
When the movable screen (front screen mechanism E1) is disposed at the first position (front standby position), the fixed screen is a projection target of the projector;
When the movable screen is disposed at the second position (front exposure position), the movable screen is disposed in front of the fixed screen and becomes a projection target of the projector instead of the fixed screen.
The shaft (shaft member E3) is disposed rearward of the fixed screen,
The rotation axes (rotation center axes FG) of the two arms (crank members E22 and E22) are disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the shaft is disposed rearward of the fixed screen as a separate item, light projected onto the fixed screen is not blocked by the shaft. In addition, since the pivoting axes of the two arms can be disposed forward of the rear end position of the fixed screen, the movable screen and the rotary screen are rotated in comparison with the case where they are disposed rearward of the rear end position of the stationary screen. The length between the moving shaft (arm length) can be shortened. Therefore, even when the space in the gaming machine is limited and the display unit can not be enlarged, the size of the movable screen can be maintained at a desired level.

(12-1) A housing (cabinet G) having an opening at the front,
A partition plate (intermediate support plate G1) for dividing the inside of the housing into a first space on the upper side and a second space on the lower side;
A display unit (display unit A) placed on the partition plate and exchangeably accommodated in the first space of the housing;
A relay substrate (relay substrate CK) for relaying a wire connecting the display unit and a device accommodated in the second space;
The display unit (A1)
A housing portion (screen housing C10) having a pair of side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) and a back plate (back plate C4);
And display means (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) housed in the housing and displaying an image,
The back plate in the housing portion is disposed forward of the rear end of the pair of side walls,
The relay substrate is disposed in a third space (GS) defined by the back plate (back wall G3) of the housing and the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing portion.
The partition plate has an opening (through hole G11) for inserting the wiring at a position facing the third space.

  Conventionally, in order to facilitate replacement of various parts, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts are unitized and made unit-by-unit exchangeable. For example, in JP 2008-183427 A, a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit obtained by unitizing a unit case housing these A gaming machine has been disclosed that is removably stored in the body. In the gaming machine disclosed in this publication, the inside of the case is vertically divided by the variable display unit mounting table, the variable display unit is attached to the upper half of the case, and devices such as a power supply device are attached to the lower half of the case. It is attached. A relay substrate for relaying a wire electrically connecting the control device of the variable display unit and the device attached to the lower half of the housing is attached to the front surface of the variable display unit. By the way, if the wiring is disposed in front of various devices in the case, the wiring interferes with the appearance and operation of the various devices, so it is desirable to arrange the wires behind the various devices. However, in the gaming machine disclosed in the above-mentioned publication, since the relay substrate is attached to the front of the variable display unit, the wiring between the relay substrate and the device attached to the lower half of the housing can be It is difficult to put it behind.

  According to the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the relay substrate is disposed in the third space in the housing, which is behind the display unit. Moreover, the wiring which connects a relay substrate and the apparatus accommodated in 2nd space penetrates the opening formed in the position which faces the 3rd space in a partition plate. As a result, since it becomes easy to arrange wiring behind various devices in a case, the freedom of arrangement of wiring can be raised. Furthermore, since the relay substrate is disposed in the third space defined by the back surface of the housing and the back plate and the pair of side plates in the housing portion, when the display unit is housed in the housing portion, the relay substrate Contact with the back of the housing can be prevented. As a result, the possibility of failure of the relay board can be reduced.

  (12-2) The relay board (relay board CK) is disposed below the third space (space GS).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the relay substrate is disposed in the lower part of the third space, the wiring is connected to the relay substrate from the second space through the opening formed in the partition plate. It becomes easy to do.

(13-1) Display unit (display unit A),
A gaming machine having a main case (cabinet G) having an opening on the front and which accommodates the display unit in an exchangeable manner,
The display unit is
Display means (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) for displaying an image;
A display unit housing (housing A1) for housing the display means;
Recesses (recesses B132) are continuously formed from the front end toward the back on both sides of the top plate member (projector cover B1) in the display unit casing, and the recesses and the main body case Then, a working space (space BS) for installing and fixing the main body casing on an island facility (fixed plate member OC) disposed above the main body casing is defined.

  Conventionally, in order to facilitate replacement of various parts, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts are unitized and made unit-by-unit exchangeable. For example, in JP 2008-183427 A, a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit obtained by unitizing a unit case housing these A gaming machine has been disclosed that is removably stored in the body. By the way, generally, gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines are installed in island facilities in game facilities to conduct sales. When installing this gaming machine in an island facility, the gaming machine is fixed to the island facility by driving a nail or the like from the inside of the casing to the island facility through a top plate. Here, when installing a gaming machine capable of replacing a unit as described above on an island facility, the gaming machine is installed with the unit removed so as not to damage the unit. Are required of workers. However, in practice, a worker does not like an increase in the amount of work and performs installation work of the gaming machine with the unit accommodated, which causes a problem that the unit is damaged. If the unit is damaged, it may not be possible to reuse the unit, and it will be different from a normal gaming machine, so it can not be recognized as a licensed gaming machine and it can not be recognized as a business. There is a risk.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the recessed portions are formed at both ends of the top plate member in the display unit casing. As a result, even in the state where the display unit is accommodated in the main body casing, a work space for installing and fixing to the island equipment is secured between the display unit and the main body casing. As a result, it is possible to install the gaming machine on the island facility with the display unit accommodated while preventing the display unit from being damaged.

(13-2) The top plate member (upper surface wall G4) of the main body case (cabinet G) is formed with an opening (opening G41) penetrating in the vertical direction,
The main body case includes a soft member (plate member G42) softer than the top plate member attached so as to close the opening with respect to the top plate member,
The work space (space BS) is a space in which nails from the soft member to the island equipment (fixed plate member OC) can be driven from the inside of the main body case.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to drive a nail without interfering with the display unit while the display unit is housed in the main body case. This makes it possible to securely fix the gaming machine to the island facility while preventing the display unit from being damaged. In addition, the game machine can be easily installed in the island facility by driving a nail into a soft member softer than the top plate member of the main body case.

(14-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) that can be a projection target of a projector (irradiated light device B) that projects an image;
A second screen which can be a projection target of the projector, which is disposed in front of the first screen and which is a projection target of the projector instead of the first screen; A second screen (a front screen mechanism E1 and a reel screen mechanism F1) operable between a second position which is out of the projection range of
A drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2 and reel screen drive mechanism F2) for driving the second screen between the first position and the second position;
A housing (screen housing C10) for housing the first screen, the second screen, and the drive mechanism;
And a relay substrate (relay substrate CK) for relaying a wire connecting the drive mechanism and a device outside the display unit,
In the case (screen case C10), at least the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) are separately molded, It is comprised by assembling a side plate and the said back plate,
Each of the first screen, the drive mechanism, and the relay substrate is positioned on any one of the bottom plate, the side plate, and the back plate, and the plates positioned and positioned on each other It is different.

  Conventionally, in order to facilitate replacement of various parts, a gaming machine is known in which a plurality of parts are unitized and made unit-by-unit exchangeable. For example, in JP 2008-183427 A, a variable display device capable of displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information, a control device for controlling the variable display device, and a variable display unit obtained by unitizing a unit case housing these A gaming machine has been disclosed that is removably stored in the body. In the gaming machine disclosed in the above-mentioned JP 2008-183427 A, the unitized variable display unit is basically a unit mounted in common regardless of the model of the gaming machine, and the gaming machine Depending on the model of, the rendering devices etc. that can not be shared among the models are not unitized. Here, if the effect device depending on the model is separately manufactured for each model, the burden of manufacturing cost becomes large.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, different functional components are positioned and arranged on each plate of the case (screen case C10). Therefore, in the entire display unit (display unit A), even if the models can not be shared, the board unit of the case may be able to be shared among the models. As a result, it becomes possible to manufacture the display unit at low cost as compared with the case of manufacturing the display unit (for each model).

  (14-2) The case (screen case C10) is assembled such that the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), the side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3), and the back plate (back plate C4) are exchangeable. It is done.

  According to the gaming machine according to the embodiment described above, the respective plates of the case (screen case C10) are assembled so as to be replaceable. Therefore, the members of the display unit (display unit A) can be replaced in plate units. As a result, by replacing the member in plate units, it is possible to change the specification of the display unit while reusing the member other than the replacement target of the display unit.

(14-3) The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is formed with a recess (center placement portion C11) for positioning and placing the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D),
The drive mechanism (front screen mechanism E1 and reel screen mechanism F1) is positioned and arranged on the side plate (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3),
The relay board (relay board CK) is positioned and arranged on the back board (back board C4).

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, since the relay board (relay board CK) for relaying the wiring is positioned and arranged on the back board (back board C4), it is difficult for the player to visually check the wiring. be able to. In addition, the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) is positioned by being placed on the recess (center placement portion C11) formed in the bottom plate (bottom plate C1), so the side plates (right side plate C2 and left side plate C3) The first screen can be positioned on the housing by a simple method, as compared with the case of positioning and positioning on the back plate (back plate C4).

(14-4) The display unit (display unit A)
Decorative member (right movable base C5, left) disposed between the drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) It further comprises a movable base C6),
The bottom plate (bottom plate C1) is formed with a recess (right placement portion C12 and left placement portion C13) for disposing the decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, by arranging the decorative member between the drive mechanism and the second screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to view the drive mechanism. As a result, the aesthetics of the gaming machine can be improved. Moreover, since the recessed part for arrange | positioning a decoration member is formed in the baseplate of a housing | casing, it becomes possible to arrange | position a decoration member in a housing | casing easily.

(15-1) A gaming machine provided with a display unit (display unit A) for displaying an image,
The display unit is
A projector (irradiated light device B) for projecting an image;
A reflection mirror (mirror mechanism B3) disposed in front of the projector for reflecting light emitted from the projector obliquely downward and backwardly;
A first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) which can be a projection target of the projector;
A second screen (front screen mechanism E1) that can be projected by the projector, wherein the first screen is disposed above the first screen and is outside the projection range of the projector (front standby position); A second screen disposed in front of the first screen and operable between a second position (front exposure position) to be projected by the projector instead of the first screen;
An arm (crank members E22 and E22) having a rotation axis (rotation center axis FG) connected to the second screen;
The second screen is moved to the first position and the second position by transmitting the drive force generated from the power source (drive motor E25) to the arm and rotating the arm about the pivot axis. And a drive power transmission body (crank gears E21, E21, intermediate gears E23, E23) operated between the second position,
From the center of the second screen (front exposed position) when the second screen (front screen mechanism E1) is in the second position (front exposure position) Also located above,
The arm is connected to a position above the second screen when the second screen is in the first position;
When the second screen is in the second position, the second screen is inclined upward from the rear end far from the reflection mirror to the front end near the reflection mirror Is configured.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that displays an image projected from a projector on a screen (see, for example, JP 2012-147828 A). According to this type of gaming machine, it is possible to achieve the same level of image expression as a liquid crystal display, and it is possible to reduce the cost when the size is increased as compared to a liquid crystal display. In addition, by appropriately setting the shape of the screen, it is possible to perform video expression impossible with the liquid crystal display. By the way, in order to widen the width of image expression, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of screens including a movable screen in a game machine. In such a game machine, when the movable screen is to be projected by the projector, it is necessary to place the movable screen in front of other screens. On the other hand, when using a screen other than the movable screen as a projection target of the projector, the movable screen needs to be disposed outside the projection range of the projector so that the projection onto the other screen is not hindered. is there. However, since the space for accommodating the display unit is limited within the casing of the gaming machine, the display unit can not be made large. As a result, the space in which the movable screen can operate is also limited, making it difficult to increase the size of the movable screen.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the pivot shaft of the arm is disposed above the center of the second screen when the second screen is in the second position, and the arm is The second screen is connected to a position above the second screen when the second screen is in the second position. As a result, the operating range when operating between the first position and the second position of the second screen can be reduced. By thus reducing the operating range of the second screen, the second screen can be made larger. In addition, when the second screen is in the first position, the second screen is configured to incline upward from the rear end far from the reflecting mirror to the front end near the reflecting mirror It is done. Thus, the vertical distance between the first screen and the second screen can be shortened within a range that does not hinder the projection of the projector onto the first screen. As a result, the second screen can be further enlarged.

  The projector (irradiation light device B) is disposed above the first screen (fixed screen mechanism D) and the second screen (front screen mechanism E1), and the lower surface of the projector is the front thereof And an inclined surface that inclines upward from the rear to the front.

  According to the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the lower surface of the projector has the inclined surface which inclines upward from the rear to the front, and therefore, the second screen in the second position and the projector The space in the vertical direction can be shortened. As a result, the second screen can be further enlarged.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of doors is known (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-52525). By providing a plurality of doors in this way, it is sufficient to open the corresponding door according to the purpose such as supply of medals, adjustment of reel equipment, repair of equipment etc. There is an advantage that it is not necessary to expose the inside.

However, in the case where a plurality of doors are provided, it is necessary to provide locking means for locking each door, which causes a problem that the unlocking operation is complicated and the number of parts is increased.
Also, inside the gaming machine, there are places that are frequently accessed such as the supply of medals, etc., security is high such as a control board etc., and there are places that are rarely accessed, depending on the security. There is also a need to adopt locking means.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing an unlocking operation and enhancing the security of the inside of the gaming machine. Do.

(16-1) One of the present invention is an upper space having an openable upper door mechanism DU,
A lower space having an openable lower door mechanism DD,
An upper door lock mechanism G52 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU;
A lower door lock mechanism G51 capable of locking the upper door mechanism DU;
Equipped with
Upper door lock mechanism G52 is
A cylinder G5222 provided in the upper space,
A locking plate G5221 slidable in a cylinder G5222 in which claws G5221a and G5221b are formed,
Locked portions G511 and G521 provided in the upper door mechanism DU,
The lower door mechanism DD is
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the lower door mechanism DD interferes with the locking plate G5221, thereby stopping the sliding of the locking plate G5221, and the locking plate G5221 is held in the cylinder G5222, and the claw portion In a state where G5221a and G5221b are locked by the locked portions G511 and G521 and the lower door mechanism DD is open, the interference with the locking plate G5221 of the lower door mechanism DD is released and the locking plate G5221 is slid. Thus, the gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the locking plate G5221 is provided at a position where the locking of the locked portions G511 and G521 is released.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed (the lower door mechanism DD is locked), the lower door mechanism DD physically interferes with the locking plate G5221 to slide the locking plate G5221. Stop moving. Then, by holding the locking plate G5221 whose slide is restrained in the cylinder G5222, the claws G5221a and G5221b are locked to the locked rods G521a and G521b, and the upper door mechanism DU is in the upper space. It will be in the locked state.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is open (the lower door mechanism DD is unlocked), physical interference with the locking plate G5221 of the lower door mechanism DD is released, so the locking plate G5221 is a cylinder. The inside of G5222 becomes slidable, and the locking of the claws G5221a and G5221b with respect to the locking rods G521a and G521b is released, and the locking of the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU can be released.
Thus, in order to release the locking of the upper door mechanism DU, a procedure for releasing the locking of the lower door mechanism DD by the lower door locking mechanism G51 can be required first. That is, in order to open the upper door mechanism DU, after unlocking the lower door lock mechanism G51 and opening the lower door mechanism DD, a procedure for unlocking the upper door lock mechanism G52 is necessary, and security for the upper space is achieved. It can be enhanced.
Thus, security can be enhanced for the upper space than for the lower space, and the lower space can be a place where access can be made more smoothly than for the upper space.

(16-2) In the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, the lower door locking mechanism G51 is a cylinder lock G513 that can be locked and unlocked by a key,
Between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space, there is provided a one-way hinge DD54 to which a predetermined torque is applied in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed,
The locking portion G522 has a claw shape,
The locked portion G521 has a rod shape,
It is characterized in that the claw portions G5221a and G5221b in the form of claws are engaged by being caught on the rod-shaped engaged rods G521a and G521b.

According to the above configuration, in order to unlock the lower door mechanism DD, it is necessary to unlock the cylinder lock G513 with the key. The manager of the gaming machine 1 has the advantage of being easy to manage because the key is compact and portable.
In addition, a one-way hinge DD54 that applies a predetermined torque in the direction in which the lower door mechanism DD is closed is adopted between the lower door mechanism DD and the lower space. As a result, torque is applied when closing the lower door mechanism DD, and the lower door mechanism DD can be quietly closed to the lower space without applying a rapid load. As a result, it is possible to prevent an abrupt load from being applied to the locking plate G5221 physically interfered by the lower door mechanism DD.
In addition, the sliding of the locking plate G5221 causes the claw-shaped claws G5221a and G5221b to be caught or released from the rod-shaped engaged rods G521a and G521b. This enables locking of the upper space of the upper door mechanism DU interlocked with the sliding of the locking plate G5221.

(16-3) The upper door mechanism DU is rotatably supported at one end of the upper space,
The upper door lock mechanism G52 is characterized in that it is provided at an end opposite to the end supported by the shaft.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper door lock mechanism G52 is disposed on the side where the upper door mechanism DU is opened and closed, the lower door mechanism DD does not have to be widely opened to unlock the upper door lock mechanism G52. . Thus, in order to unlock the upper door mechanism DU, the inside of the lower space is not unnecessarily exposed to the outside, and security can be enhanced.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-24410, a gaming machine is known in which components are divided into a plurality of units and connected by a connecting member. By thus dividing the configuration into a plurality of units, it is only necessary to replace the units when changing or repairing the specifications, and there is an advantage that changing or repairing the specifications becomes easy.

  However, if the number of units is divided into a plurality of units, it may take time to assemble, replace, or disassemble.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing operations in assembling, replacing parts, and disassembling a gaming machine. Do.

(17-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G having an openable lower door DD1;
A plurality of reels RL, RC, and RR provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1 and having a plurality of types of symbols disposed thereon, and performing variation display and stop display of the symbols disposed on the reels RL, RC, and RR A reel unit RU capable of
A start lever DD6 for outputting a command signal according to an operation by a player;
A symbol provided on the back side of the reel unit RU and arranged on the reels RL, RC, RR by stopping the rotation of the reels RL, RC, RR based on a command signal output from the start lever DD6 With the main control board MS to display stop
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the lower door DD1 is provided with the reel unit RU, and the reel unit RU is further provided with the main control board MS. As described above, by unifying the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS, it is possible to easily carry out an operation when assembling, replacing parts or disassembling the gaming machine 1.
Also, the main control board MS is an important configuration for controlling the game, and it is necessary to take measures to prevent unauthorized removal. However, since the main control board MS is integrated with the reel unit RU, removal is difficult. It can be configured.
The main control board MS is provided on the back surface of the reel unit RU provided on the inner side of the lower door DD1. Thereby, the main control board MS can be disposed on the back side of the cabinet G far from the lower door DD1 by the thickness of the lower door DD1 and the reel unit RU. Thereby, a physical distance can be secured between the lower door DD1 and the main control substrate MS, and even when the unauthorized intrusion is made from the gap of the lower door DD1, the main control substrate MS can be reached. It becomes difficult and can improve security.

  (17-2) The present invention is characterized in that, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed.

  According to the above configuration, since the lower door DD1, the reel unit RU, and the main control board MS are integrally formed, when changing the specification of the gaming machine 1, the change of the exterior of the lower door DD1, the reel RL, It is possible to collectively change the symbols of RC and RR and change the game contents.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-65493, a cover is provided for covering the operation plate in order to prevent an unauthorized operation on the operation plate provided in the power supply device, and the cover is attached to the closed position. There is known a gaming machine provided with a cover energizing means for energizing. According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation on the power supply device.

  However, if the biasing force by the cover biasing means is increased, a strong force is required to open the cover, and the operability may be reduced. In addition, if the biasing force of the cover biasing means is weakened, a sufficient biasing force may not be applied to the operation plate, which may lower the effectiveness of preventing an unauthorized operation.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the security of the power supply without reducing the operability of the power supply. I assume.

(18-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G having an openable lower door mechanism DD,
A power supply device DE provided in the lower space,
A speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD;
Equipped with
Power supply DE is
A power switch DE1 for selecting whether or not to supply power;
The switch cover DE2 is switched by moving to an open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated and a closed state in which the power switch DE1 can not be operated,
Speaker DD25L is
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, it has a projection DD25L1 that interrupts the movement path of the switch cover DE2 and restricts the switch cover DE2 from being opened. .

According to the above configuration, by closing the lower door mechanism DD, the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD interrupts the moving path of the switch cover DE2, and the switch cover DE2 is opened. It can be regulated. On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the restriction on the switch cover DE2 of the convex portion DD25L1 of the speaker DD25L provided in the lower door mechanism DD is released, so that the switch cover DE2 can not be operated with the power switch DE1. It is possible to switch from the closed state to the open state in which the power switch DE1 can be operated.
As a result, while ensuring the operability of the power switch DE1 in the state where the lower door mechanism DD is opened, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized operation on the power supply device DE and to enhance security.

(18-2) In the gaming machine 1, the switch cover DE2 is switched to the closed state and the open state by sliding in the gaming machine 1,
The convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, the movement path in which the switch cover DE2 slides is interrupted and the switch cover DE2 is restricted from sliding and becoming open.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to switch between the closed state and the open state by sliding the switch cover DE2. This makes it possible to facilitate access to the power switch DE1 with the lower door mechanism DD open.
Further, the convex portion DD25L1 provided on the convex portion DD25L1 has a convex shape, so that the volume of the speaker DD25L itself can be increased, and the sound quality can be simultaneously improved.

(13-1) In the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, the switch cover DE2 has a slope DE2a,
The convex portion DD25L1 also has an inclined surface DD25La,
When the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 abuts against the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and is pushed to slide the switch cover DE2 closed It is characterized by being in a state.

According to the above configuration, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the closed state, the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2 and the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 are disposed opposite to each other. The slide of the cover DE2 can be regulated.
On the other hand, when the lower door mechanism DD is closed when the switch cover DE2 is in the open state, the switch cover DE2 is at a position shifted from the closed position, so the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 is the switch cover DE2. The switch cover DE2 slides and moves to the closed position because the switch cover DE2 abuts on the inclined surface DE2a.
Thereby, even if the switch cover DE2 is closed and the lower door mechanism DD is closed in the open state, the inclined surface DD25La of the convex portion DD25L1 becomes the inclined surface DE2a of the switch cover DE2, for example. Since it presses in contact, it is possible to slide the switch cover DE2 to move it to the closed position in conjunction with the operation of closing the lower door mechanism DD.

(19-1) A housing (cabinet G) in which an opening (supply opening G31) through which the supply path (the medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the back surface (back wall G3)
A shielding member (shielding member MH1) which is formed in a flat plate shape capable of shielding the opening from the inside of the housing, and is screwed and fixed to the back surface in a shielding state where the opening is shielded;
A guide portion slidably guiding the shielding member (shielding member MH1) from the shielding state to the open state in which the opening is exposed, and a holding portion (holding portion MH23a) capable of holding the shielding member in the open state A guide member (guide member MH2) having
Equipped with

  Conventionally, a game machine is installed on an installation island of a game arcade. It is known that such an installation island is provided with an automatic circulation and supply device for supplying game media such as medals to the game machine.

  In order to replenish game media from the automatic circulation replenishment device, it is common that an opening is formed on the back of the gaming machine case. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-212282, an automatic circulation replenishment device connection opening consisting of four arc-shaped openings whose connection is interrupted by the cutting portion is formed on the back of the gaming machine. When installing the gaming machine on the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is installed, the cutting portion is cut off and the inner closing plate is removed to form an opening on the back of the housing, thereby supplying the automatic circulation replenishment device The passage can be inserted through this opening. For example, an outlet is disposed above the hopper tank of the pachislot machine so that medals can be supplied to the hopper tank as appropriate.

  By the way, with regard to installed gaming machines, changing of the place of arrangement and moving to a different game are generally performed. However, when the automatic circulation replenishment device is not installed on the installation island where the gaming machine is newly installed, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the opening on the back of the case once formed is maintained as it is, so Could be used fraudulently. Therefore, when the gaming machine applied to the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is installed is applied to the installation island on which the automatic circulation replenishment device is not installed, there is a problem that the security is lowered.

  According to the above configuration, an opening through which the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device can be inserted is formed on the rear surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The shield member is guided in sliding movement between the shield state and the open state by the guide member. In addition, the shielding member can be screwed and fixed to the rear surface of the housing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. Thus, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island on which the automatic circulation and replenishment device is installed, the shielding member is slid to be in the open state, and the replenishment path of the automatic circulation and replenishment device is inserted through the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, the shielding member can be prevented from disappearing. Furthermore, when moving the gaming machine, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and screwing it in a shielding state. As a result, even after the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is not installed after being applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is installed, the opening is shielded by the shielding member that is held. Security can be maintained.

(19-2) A housing (cabinet G) in which an opening (supply opening G31) through which the supply path (the medal supply port P) of the automatic circulation supply device can be inserted is formed on the back surface (back wall G3);
It is formed in a rectangular plate shape capable of shielding the opening from the inside of the housing, and screwing fixation is enabled to the back surface in a shielding state where the opening is shielded, and the upper edge is perpendicular to the back surface A shielding member (shielding member MH1) in which a protruding part (protruding part MH12) is formed;
An upper edge (upper edge MH21) formed along the upper edge outside of the shielding member in the shielding state and restricting the vertical upward movement of the shielding member, and one end of the upper edge And the two side edges (side edges MH22 and MH22) formed along the side edges of the shielding member in the shielding state in a vertically downward direction from the one end, and the other ends of the two side edges A lower end of a guide groove (guide groove MH23b) is formed on the back side to connect the two and the shielding member is slid in the vertical direction, and supports the projection of the shielding member on the upper surface to hold the shielding member. A guide member (guide member MH2) having a portion (lower edge portion 23, holding portion MH23a);
Equipped with

  According to the above configuration, an opening through which the replenishment path of the automatic circulation replenishment device can be inserted is formed on the rear surface of the housing, and this opening can be shielded by the shielding member. The shield member is guided to slide between the shield state and the open state by the guide groove formed at the lower edge of the guide member. In addition, the sliding of the shielding member is restricted by the upper edge of the guide member from moving vertically upward and by the two side edges and the lower edge from restricting horizontal movement. It is possible to prevent the guide member from coming off when the shield member slides. In addition, the shielding member can be screwed and fixed to the rear surface of the housing in the shielding state, and is held by the guide member in the open state. Thus, when the gaming machine is installed on the installation island on which the automatic circulation and replenishment device is installed, the shielding member is slid to be in the open state, and the replenishment path of the automatic circulation and replenishment device is inserted through the opening on the back surface. At this time, since the shielding member is held by the holding portion, the shielding member can be prevented from disappearing. Furthermore, when moving the gaming machine, the opening can be shielded by sliding the shielding member and screwing it in a shielding state. As a result, even after the game machine is applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is not installed after being applied to the installation island where the automatic circulation replenishment device is installed, the opening is shielded by the shielding member that is held. Security can be maintained.

(19-3) The protruding portion of the shielding member protrudes more than the lower edge portion holding the shielding member.

  According to the above configuration, the protrusion can be easily grasped, and the open state can be easily shifted to the shield state.

  Conventionally, in order to prevent the medals from overflowing from the hopper device or the auxiliary storage, a medal overflow preventing member such as a guide member is provided, and the medals flow from the selector to the hopper device, and the hopper device to the auxiliary storage There is known a gaming machine which prevents the medals flowing into the hopper from overflowing from the hopper device and the auxiliary storage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-188397). According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the problem that the overflowing medals accumulate inside the gaming machine and interfere with other electronic devices and movable members.

  However, in recent years, there is a new flow of medals other than the flow of medals described above, such as when automatically replenishing medals from the outside, and it is necessary to take measures against the flow of these new medals.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing the medals from overflowing from the hopper device or the like even when the medals are supplied from the outside. The purpose is

(20-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G,
A medal supply mechanism MH provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and receiving a thin metal medal inside the cabinet G,
A hopper mechanism HP having a bucket HP1 for storing medals received from the medal replenishment mechanism MH,
A coin which is disposed under the medal replenishment mechanism MH and is provided over the bucket HP1 from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G so as to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP. With guard HP30,
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that

  According to the above configuration, since the coin guard HP30 is provided to fill the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP, the medal received from the medal supply mechanism MH is a bucket Even if it is likely to overflow from the HP 1, it can be prevented from entering the gap HPG between the back wall G 3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP 1 of the hopper mechanism HP. As a result, it is possible to prevent the problem that the overflowing medals accumulate in the gap HPG between the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP and interfere with other electronic devices or movable members.

(20-2) The present invention provides the gaming machine 1 with the overflow bucket OF, which is provided at a predetermined distance from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, and stores the medals overflowing from the bucket HP1 of the hopper mechanism HP.
The coin guard HP30 is L-shaped by combining the first guard HP301 provided on the bucket HP1 from the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and the second guard HP302 provided on the bucket HP1 from the overflow bucket OF. It is characterized in that it is formed in a shape and inclined so as to fall into the bucket HP1 side.

According to the above configuration, the coin guard HP 30 can be disposed also between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP 1. This can prevent the medals from overflowing between the overflow bucket OF and the bucket HP1.
In addition, even when the medal is on the coin guard HP30, since the medal is inclined to the bucket HP1 side, the medal slides down to the bucket HP1 side by its own weight, and the medal can be normally stored in the hopper mechanism HP. .

  Conventionally, as shown in JP 2012-20154 A, when a hopper (coin dispensing device) capable of storing a plurality of coins is slide-installed inside a housing, a connector provided behind the hopper is housed. There is known a gaming machine which can be electrically connected to a connector provided inside the body. According to such a gaming machine, the physical installation on the housing of the hopper and the electrical connection can be simultaneously performed, so that the working efficiency of the installation, replacement, and inspection of the hopper can be improved.

  However, when sliding the hopper inside the housing, if you slide the hopper at a shifted position, the connector provided behind the hopper may contact the back plate of the housing and damage it. There is.

  In this respect, in JP 2012-20154 A, a guide rail for guiding the hopper to slide is provided. However, when the hopper is rapidly installed, the slide is installed without being properly guided by the guide portion. In some cases, the connector can not be sufficiently protected only by the guide portion.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a hopper can be normally slide-installed inside a housing.

(21-1) The present invention relates to the gaming machine 1 in which the connector HP41 provided on the back surface of the hopper mechanism HP is connected to the connector G81 provided on the back side of the cabinet G,
A pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both sides of the hopper mechanism HP;
A bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G is provided with upper portions HG121 and HG131 and lower portions HG123 and HG133, and a pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 is sandwiched between the upper portions HG121 and HG131 and lower portions HG123 and HG133. And a pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13 capable of guiding the hopper mechanism HP slidably in the depth direction of the cabinet G in the engaged state.
Protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 and forward of the connector HP41,
The game machine 1 has

According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is slide-installed on the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the pair of guide pieces HP21 and HP22 provided on both sides of the hopper mechanism HP are the upper portions of the guide rails HG12 and HG13. When the HG121 · HG131 and the lower part HG123 · HG133 are not sandwiched and accidentally slipped over the upper part HG121 · HG131 of the guide rails HG12 · HG13, the guide pieces HP21 · HP22 are the guide rail By contacting the protrusions HG124 and HG134 provided above the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the HG12 and HG13, it is possible to prevent the hopper mechanism HP from being slidingly installed at the wrong position. That is, it becomes possible to slide and install the hopper mechanism HP inside the cabinet G normally.
As a result, the hopper mechanism HP is slidably installed at an incorrect position, and the hopper mechanism HP can be prevented from contacting the connector G81 and damaging the connector G81.

  (21-2) The present invention is a gaming machine characterized in that a portion of the upper portion HG121 / HG131 of the guide rails HG12 / HG13 disposed in front of the cabinet G is tapered.

  According to the above configuration, when the hopper mechanism HP is engaged with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the upper portions HG121 and HG131 of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 can be prevented from contacting the hopper mechanism HP.

  (21-3) According to the present invention, the lower portion HG123 / HG133, the upper portion HG121 / HG131, and the projecting portion HG124 / HG134 of the pair of guide rails HG12 / HG13 are integrally formed by bending a single plate Game machine characterized by

  According to the above configuration, the lower portions HG123 and HG133 of the pair of guide rails HG12 and HG13, the upper portions HG121 and HG131, and the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 can be produced by a single plate. Thereby, simplification of a manufacturing process can be achieved.

  (21-4) Since the protruding portions HG124 and HG134 are on the back side of the cabinet G, when temporarily setting the hopper mechanism HP around the guide rails HG12 and HG13 as a preparatory step to engage with the guide rails HG12 and HG13. Can be out of the way.

  (21-5) Since the flat space HG17 is provided in front of the guide rails HG12 and HG13 of the bottom plate G91 of the cabinet G, the guide pieces HP21 and HP22 of the hopper mechanism HP are provided in the flat space HG17. As a preparatory step before engaging with the guide rails HG12 and HG13, the hopper mechanism HP can be temporarily placed. As a result, the hopper mechanism HP can be slidably installed at the bottom of the cabinet G.

  Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a control board for controlling lottery and effect accompanying a game is disposed at the top of a housing, and a hopper device for handling medals is disposed at the bottom of the housing (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-188395 Issue). According to such a gaming machine, since there is a distance between the control board and the hopper device, the medals are prevented from physically contacting the control board, and the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the medals is also possible. It can be made smaller.

  However, in recent years, in order to simplify parts replacement, recycling, etc., the operation device, the rendering device, etc. are often unitized and arranged in the upper part of the casing. Then, for convenience of design, the control board may be disposed at the lower part of the housing, and the distance between the control board and the hopper device may be short.

  As a result, since the distance between the control board and the hopper device becomes short, the medal may physically contact the control board or the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the medals may increase.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and the medal physically contacts the control board even when the distance between the control board and the hopper device is short. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing the effects of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between medals.

(22-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G having an upper space and a lower space,
A display unit A provided in the upper space,
A sub control device SS disposed on the back side of the lower space and in charge of control related to gaming;
A hopper mechanism HP disposed on the front side of the sub controller SS in the lower space and storing a metallic medal,
A sheet metal BK provided between the sub controller SS and the hopper mechanism HP;
Equipped with
The sub control unit SS is the gaming machine 1 characterized in that it is sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK.

According to the above configuration, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub controller SS and the hopper mechanism HP, even if the medals flow into the hopper mechanism HP and jump out to the sub controller SS side, the sheet metal BK Can prevent the medals from physically contacting the sub-control device SS. Further, since the sheet metal BK is provided between the sub controller SS and the hopper mechanism HP, the sheet metal BK can prevent the influence of radiation (electromagnetic field) due to the contact between the metallic medals in the hopper mechanism HP.
Further, since the sub-control device SS is provided on the back side of the lower space and is sandwiched between the back wall G3 of the lower space and the sheet metal BK, the sub-control device SS does not remove the sheet metal BK; I can not remove it. Thereby, the security with respect to the sub control device SS is enhanced.

  (22-2) Since the sheet metal BK is connected to the metal frame of the gaming machine 1, radiation due to the contact of the medals with the sheet metal BK and radiation due to the contact between the metallic medals due to the dropping of the medals are It can be grounded via a metal frame.

  Conventionally, as described in JP 2010-12239 A, a button unit provided with a locking portion elastically deformed on the side surface is provided to be able to be attached from the front surface to the opening of the front door, A gaming machine is known in which a button unit is provided with a flange portion larger than the opening in order to fill the gap between the button unit and the opening. In such a game machine, the button unit can be easily fitted into the opening from the front side using elastic deformation of the locking portion. In addition, since the flange portion fills the gap between the button unit and the opening, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as inserting a wire or the like from the gap to elastically deform the locking portion and removing the button unit.

  However, there is a case where the button unit can not be sufficiently fixed to the front door only by elastically deforming and fixing the locking portion to the back of the front door. In addition, the appearance of the flange may be impaired by exposing the flange to the outside (front door).

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of firmly fixing a button to a housing.

(23-1) One of the present invention is a cabinet G,
A second pedestal DD2b provided in the cabinet G and a maximum BET button DD8 attached via an opening DD2ba formed in the second pedestal DD2b;
Equipped with
Maximum BET button DD8
An operation unit DD81 disposed outside the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba and having communication holes DD816a and DD816b and screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b and having a flange DD8111 larger than the opening DD2ba;
A locking portion DD82 disposed on the inner side of the cabinet G with respect to the opening DD2ba and having communication holes DD826a and DD826b and having a flange DD823 larger than the opening DD2ba;
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that the communication holes DD826a and DD826b, the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and the screws DD83a and DD83b communicating with and screwing the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b are provided.

  According to the above configuration, the operation portion DD81 and the locking portion DD82 are opened by the communication holes DD826a and DD826b, the communication holes DD816a and DD816b, and the screws DD83a and DD83b communicating with and screwing the screw holes DD8163a and DD8163b. It can fix to the 2nd pedestal part DD2b via part DD2ba. Further, since the operation unit DD81 has a portion larger than the opening DD2ba, the maximum BET button DD8 can be prevented from falling from the outside of the opening DD2ba to the inside of the cabinet G. Further, since the locking portion DD 82 also has the flange DD 823 larger than the opening DD 2 ba, it is possible to prevent the maximum BET button DD 8 from coming out of the inside of the opening DD 2 ba to the outside of the cabinet G. As a result, the maximum BET button DD8 can be fixed to the second pedestal DD2b.

(23-2) In the gaming machine 1 of the present invention, the operation unit DD81 is
A button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b;
A first member DD812 that can slide through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD 813 for returning the DD 812 pushed in by pressing to the initial position;
Have
The shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same.

According to the above configuration, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the upper surface of the button base DD811 are the same, when the first member DD812 is viewed from above, the button base DD811 is formed by the first member DD812 It is possible to hide and show only the first member DD 812 pressed by the player to the outside. Thereby, the appearance of the maximum BET button DD8 can be simplified, and the design of the appearance of the gaming machine 1 can be enhanced.
In addition, since the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 and the shape of the top surface of the button base DD811 are the same, the shape of the bottom surface of the first member DD812 is smaller than that of the top surface of the button base DD811. It can be made a structure which is easy to prevent the unauthorized penetration | invasion from the clearance gap of through-hole DD811a * DD811b which base DD811 has.

(24-1) A symbol display means (reel device capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols arranged on the reels) provided with reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 etc.) for outputting a start command signal according to the operation by the player;
Fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive that performs fluctuation display of the symbols arranged on the reels by rotating the reels in response to detection of the start command signal output from the start instruction means) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal according to the operation by the player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal outputted from the stop command means , Motor drive unit RU113 etc.),
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position with rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU 1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference (circumferential RUD) with the rotation of the reel;
A sensor (sensor unit RU112) that takes one point on the circumference (detection point RUP) as a detection position;
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
Equipped with
The reference position specifying means sets the position of the reel when it detects that the detection piece has changed from the state not detected to the detected state as a first reference position, and the detection piece is detected. The position of the reel when it is detected that the state has changed to the undetected state is taken as a second reference position,
The detection piece is continuously detected by the sensor until the second reference position is reached after the position of the reel becomes the first reference position.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Control the operation of the motor based on the stop switch, the motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. , And a reel control unit for rotating and stopping each reel, and detecting that the start lever has been operated, based on the random number value. Game machines known as pachislot machines that stop reel rotation based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button has been operated. It is done.

  As such a conventional game machine, a game machine using a stepping motor as a motor for driving rotation of a reel is known (refer to JP-A-2006-263284). In such a gaming machine, a detection piece (reel index) is provided at a specific location of the reel, and the position of the reel can be calculated based on the number of times of pulse output based on the detection of the reel index. . By calculating the position of the reel using such a method, it is not necessary to provide the number of detection pieces corresponding to the design, and the cost can be reduced.

  However, the position of the reel calculated while the detection piece is not detected is a theoretical position determined based on the number of times the pulse is output, and an irregular case occurs, such as stopping the reel with a hand. May not necessarily match the actual reel position.

  According to the above configuration, the detection piece rotating along the predetermined circumference along with the rotation of the reel is continuously detected by the sensor whose detection position is one point on the circumference. Then, the first reference position is specified by detecting that the detection piece has changed from the undetected state to the detected state (so-called on-edge), and the detection piece is detected from the detected state The second reference position is identified by detecting the change to the non-state (so-called off-edge). Therefore, it is possible to perform detection twice when the position of the reel becomes the first reference position and when the position of the reel becomes the second reference position while the reel rotates once. As described above, since the detection is performed twice while the reel rotates once, the time until the stop operation becomes effective after the rotational speed of the reel theoretically reaches the specified speed (after the acceleration processing is completed) Can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of not being able to perform one round push due to the relationship between the position of the symbol to be pressed and the position of the detection piece, and as a result, unevenness in timing when the stop operation becomes effective It is possible to prevent the player from feeling inconvenience when stopping operation.

(24-2) The first reference position and the second reference position are oppositely disposed on a straight line passing through the central axis of the reel with the central axis interposed therebetween,
The detection piece includes an area extending from a position corresponding to the first reference position to a position corresponding to the second reference position along the circumferential path on the circumferential path, the second reference position And a region extending from the position corresponding to the position along the circumferential path to the position corresponding to the first reference position.

  According to the above configuration, even if only one sensor is provided, it is possible to perform detection twice during one rotation of the reel, and the same effect as in the case where two sensors are provided is obtained. Be That is, without increasing the number of sensors, it is possible to reduce the possibility of not being able to perform one-round pressing due to the relationship between the position of the symbol to be pressed and the position of the detection piece.

(25-1) A symbol display means (reel capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols arranged on the reels, provided with a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which plural types of symbols are arranged Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 etc.) for outputting a start command signal according to the operation by the player;
Fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive that performs fluctuation display of the symbols arranged on the reels by rotating the reels in response to detection of the start command signal output from the start instruction means) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal according to the operation by the player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal outputted from the stop command means , Motor drive unit RU113 etc.),
And illumination means (backlight RR4 etc.) for illuminating from behind the symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display means, and
Between two adjacent ones of the plurality of reels, a support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reels is disposed,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  As such a conventional game machine, a game machine provided with a back lamp for irradiating a pattern from the inside of a reel is known (refer to JP 2009-178268 A). According to such a gaming machine, when the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, it is possible to have a rendering effect on the symbols themselves, such as highlighting the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols.

  However, in general, in the gaming machine, since a plurality of reels are provided adjacent to each other in the lateral direction, the lights of the back lamps irradiating the adjacent reels interfere with each other, resulting in a good rendering effect. There was a problem that we could not expect.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate for supporting the reels is disposed between two adjacent reels, and the front portion of the support plate is formed in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view. Accordingly, since the support plate has a shape projecting forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the support plate has a function as a partition plate, thereby lighting one reel. Light can be prevented from reaching the adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not simply imparted by increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is imparted by forming the front portion of the support plate in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view. Therefore, the support plate does not stand out from the appearance of the player, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be prevented from being impaired.

  The support plate has a front portion in a substantially arcuate shape in a side view, and a rear (for example, a substantially rectangular shape in a side view) continuously formed rearward from both ends of an arc defining the bow in side view It can be constituted by a part. The bow shape is a figure surrounded by a circular arc and a chord connecting the ends of the circular arc.

  Also, the support plate may support the reel directly, or may support the reel indirectly via another member. For example, the support plate may be a motor mounting plate for mounting a motor (stepping motor) that rotationally drives the reel.

(25-2) A symbol display means (reel capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols arranged on the reels) provided with a plurality of reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged Device RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 etc.) for outputting a start command signal according to the operation by the player;
Fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive that performs fluctuation display of the symbols arranged on the reels by rotating the reels in response to detection of the start command signal output from the start instruction means) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal according to the operation by the player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal outputted from the stop command means , Motor drive unit RU113 etc.),
And illumination means (backlight RR4 etc.) for illuminating from behind the symbol stopped and displayed in the symbol display means, and
Between two adjacent ones of the plurality of reels, a support plate (motor mounting plate RU11) for supporting the reels is disposed,
The front portion of the support plate is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view.

  According to the above configuration, the support plate for supporting the reel is disposed between two adjacent reels, and the front portion of the support plate is formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. Accordingly, since the support plate has a shape projecting forward as compared with a support plate having a rectangular shape in a side view, the support plate has a function as a partition plate, thereby lighting one reel. Light can be prevented from reaching the adjacent reels. Moreover, the function as a partition plate is not simply imparted by increasing the size of the support plate, but such a function is imparted by forming the front portion of the support plate in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view. Therefore, the support plate does not stand out from the appearance of the player, and the appearance of the gaming machine can be prevented from being impaired.

  The front portion of the support plate formed in substantially the same shape as the reel in a side view preferably has substantially the same size as the portion of the opposing reel, and it is desirable that the two overlap each other. That is, when viewed from one side, the front portion of the support plate is substantially completely covered by the reel, and when viewed from the other side, the portion of the reel opposed to the portion is substantially covered by the forward portion of the support plate. It is desirable to be completely covered. Thus, it is possible to realize in a well-balanced manner the function as a partition plate to the support plate and the maintenance of the aesthetics of the gaming machine.

  For example, the support plate is formed continuously from the substantially semicircular front portion overlapping with the front half of the reel in side view and from both ends of the arc defining the semicircle in side view toward the rear. You may be comprised by the back part of shape (for example, side view substantially rectangular shape).

(26-1) A symbol display means (reel device capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols arranged on the reels) provided with reels (reels RL, RC, RR) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 etc.) for outputting a start command signal according to the operation by the player;
Fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive that performs fluctuation display of the symbols arranged on the reels by rotating the reels in response to detection of the start command signal output from the start instruction means) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.)
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal according to the operation by the player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal outputted from the stop command means , Motor drive unit RU113 etc.),
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position with rotation;
A detection piece (detection piece RU 1112) that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel rotates;
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece;
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
Equipped with
The sensor is attached to a motor attachment plate (motor attachment plate RU11) for attaching a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a pedestal member (a pedestal member RU1122).
In the motor mounting plate, screw insertion portions (screw holes RU11c and RU11d) into which screws (screws RU1124a and RU1124b) for fastening the base member to the motor mounting plate can be inserted are first predetermined locations and 2 at two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDB) substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDA) which is provided at a predetermined location and which connects the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location Positioning insertion portions (fitting holes RU11e and RU11f) are provided at third and fourth predetermined locations located opposite to each other with respect to the first straight line.
The pedestal member is provided with positioning projections (protrusions RU1122j and RU1122k) which can be inserted into the positioning insertion portions provided at the two places.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on the rotation path. Then, the position at which the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on the reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the above-mentioned conventional sensor for detecting the reel index is generally disposed on a motor mounting plate to which the motor of the reel is attached via a pedestal member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if accurate positioning of the base member on the motor mounting plate is not performed, the gaming machine may be damaged due to the erroneous determination of the game result determined based on the reel stop position or the contact between the sensor and the reel index. There was a risk of

  According to the above configuration, when the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are attached, the positioning projection of the pedestal member is inserted into the positioning insertion portion of the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position of the motor mounting plate. The pedestal member can be positioned relative to the mounting plate, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the motor mounting plate and the pedestal member are screwed and fixed. The position of the base member relative to the motor mounting plate is regulated at four positions of two screw insertion portions and two positioning insertion portions, and a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion portions and two positioning insertion portions Are set so as to be perpendicular to a second straight line connecting the two. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the position of the pedestal member with respect to the motor mounting plate. Furthermore, since screwing is only two places of two screw insertion parts, attachment work can be simplified. As a result, mounting of the base member to the motor mounting plate can be performed simply and accurately, and erroneous determination of the game result and breakage of the gaming machine can be prevented.

(26-2) The positioning insertion portion provided at one of the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the second linear direction is a longitudinal direction. .

  According to the above configuration, one of the two positioning insertion portions disposed on the second straight line is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the second straight line direction is the longitudinal direction. In this way, it is possible to allow an error in the spacing in forming the two positioning protrusions in the base member.

  The longitudinal direction of the positioning insertion portion is substantially perpendicular to the tangential direction of the rotation of the detection piece at the detection position of the sensor.

  According to the above configuration, even if the positional deviation from the base member occurs in the fitting hole having the longitudinal direction, it is possible to prevent the erroneous detection of the reference position of the reel by the sensor.

(27-1) A symbol display means (reel device capable of performing variable display and stop display of symbols arranged on the reels) provided with reels (reels RL, RC, RR) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged RU),
Start command means (start lever DD6 etc.) for outputting a start command signal according to the operation by the player;
Fluctuation control means (main control board MS, drive that performs fluctuation display of the symbols arranged on the reels by rotating the reels in response to detection of the start command signal output from the start instruction means) Control board RU114, motor drive unit RU113, etc.
Stop command means (stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, DD7R, etc.) for outputting a stop command signal according to the operation by the player;
Stop control means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114) for stopping and displaying the symbols arranged on the reel by stopping the rotation of the reel based on the stop command signal outputted from the stop command means , Motor drive unit RU113 etc.),
Reel position specifying means (main control board MS, drive control board RU114, etc.) for specifying the degree of displacement of the reel from the reference position with rotation;
A detection piece that rotates along a predetermined circumference as the reel rotates;
A sensor (sensor RU1121) for detecting the detection piece;
Reference position specifying means (main control board MS or the like) for specifying whether the reel has reached the reference position based on the detection of the detection piece by the sensor;
Equipped with
The reel position specifying means
The sensor is attached to a motor attachment plate (motor attachment plate RU11) for attaching a motor that rotationally drives the reel via a pedestal member (a pedestal member RU1122).
In the base member, screw insertion portions (screw holes RU1122c and screw holes RU1122d) into which screws (screws RU1123a and RU1123b) for fastening the sensor to the base member can be inserted are the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location And two locations on a second straight line (straight line RUDD) substantially perpendicular to a first straight line (straight line RUDC) connecting the first predetermined location and the second predetermined location. Positioning projections (protrusions RU1122e and RU1122f) are provided at the third predetermined position and the fourth predetermined position located closer to the side where the sensor detects the detection piece than the first straight line.
The sensor is provided with a positioning insertion portion (fitting holes RU1124e and RU1124f) into which the positioning projections provided at the two places can be inserted.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels on which a plurality of symbols are arranged on each surface, game medals, coins and the like ("medals and the like") are inserted, and it is detected that the player operates the start lever, and a plurality of reels. Detects that the player has pressed the start switch requesting the start of rotation and the stop button provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel Operation of the stepping motor based on the stop switch, the stepping motor provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and transmitting the respective driving force to each reel, and the signal outputted by the start switch and the stop switch. A reel control unit for controlling and rotating each reel and stopping the operation, and that the start lever is operated When it comes out, the lottery is performed based on the random number value, and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the result of the lottery ("internal winning combination") and the timing when it is detected that the stop button is operated. Known gaming machines are known.

  In such a gaming machine, a reel index that rotates coaxially with the reel is provided in order to accurately control the rotation of the reel (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-263284). The reel index rotates along a predetermined circumference, and the passage of the reel index is detected by a sensor whose detection position is one point on the rotation path. Then, the position at which the reel index is detected is set as the reference position of the reel, and the position of the reel is calculated based on the reference position and the number of excitation steps of the stepping motor.

  By the way, the above-mentioned conventional sensor for detecting the reel index is generally disposed on a motor mounting plate to which the motor of the reel is attached via a pedestal member. Thereby, the sensor is arranged near the rotation path of the reel index. However, if accurate positioning of the sensor on the base member is not performed, there is a possibility that damage to the gaming machine may occur due to erroneous determination of the game result determined based on the reel stop position or contact between the sensor and the reel index. was there.

  According to the above configuration, when the pedestal member and the sensor are attached, the positioning projections of the third predetermined location and the fourth predetermined location of the pedestal member are inserted into the positioning insertion portion of the sensor, whereby Positioning can be performed, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion portion in the positioned state, and the base member and the sensor are screwed and fixed. The position of the sensor with respect to the base member is regulated at four points of two screw insertion parts and two positioning protrusions, and further connects a first straight line connecting the two screw insertion parts and two positioning insertion parts The second straight line is set to be perpendicular. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the position of the sensor with respect to the pedestal member. Furthermore, since screwing is only two places of two screw insertion parts, attachment work can be simplified. As a result, attachment of the sensor to the base member can be performed simply and accurately positioned, and erroneous determination of the game result and breakage of the gaming machine can be prevented.

(27-2)
The screw insertion portion provided at one of the first predetermined portion and the second predetermined portion is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the first linear direction is a longitudinal direction.

  According to the above configuration, one of the two screw insertion portions disposed on the first straight line is formed in an elongated hole shape in which the first straight line direction is the longitudinal direction. This allows for an error in the spacing in molding the two screwing points in the sensor.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245279, there is known a gaming machine which is attached after attaching a button unit and provided with a locking member for preventing unauthorized removal of the button unit. According to such a gaming machine, by attaching the locking member to the existing button unit, unauthorized removal of the button unit can be prevented without changing the existing button unit.

  However, in order to prevent unauthorized removal of the button unit, attaching a new additional component needs to secure a storage space for the additional component in the gaming machine, which may not be easy to apply. .

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing unauthorized removal of a button unit while suppressing upsizing of parts. Do.

(28-1) One of the present invention is a button base DD811 having through holes DD811a and DD811b,
A first member DD812 that can slide through holes DD811a and DD811b by pressing;
A spring DD813 for returning the first member DD812 pushed in by pressing to the initial position;
A photosensor DD 814 having a light emitting portion DD 814 a and a light receiving portion DD 814 b,
A second member DD815 having a light blocking piece DD8151 for blocking between the light emitting portion DD814a and the light receiving portion DD814b of the photosensor DD814;
Equipped with a maximum BET button DD8,
The second member DD815 is
It has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The gaming machine 1 is characterized in that it is attached to a portion of the first member DD812 that extends from the through holes DD811a and DD811b.

According to the above configuration, the second member DD815 has a shape larger than the through holes DD811a and DD811b provided in the button base DD811, and is attached to a part of the first member DD812 extending from the through holes DD811a and DD811b. It is done. As a result, the second member DD 815 restricts the first member DD 812 from coming off from the through holes DD 811 a and DD 811 b, and unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD 8 can be prevented.
Moreover, since other members are not adopted, the enlargement of parts can be suppressed.

(28-2) According to the present invention, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, two through holes DD811a and DD811b are formed in the button base DD811,
The first member DD812 has two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b that can slide in the two through holes DD811a and DD811b,
The second member DD815 is attached so as to connect between the two sliding parts DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b, and the light shield piece DD8151 is formed by two penetrations of the second member DD815. It is characterized in that it is provided at an intermediate portion between two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the holes DD811a and DD811b.

  According to the above configuration, in the light shielding piece DD8151, the two sliding portions DD8124a and DD8124b slide in the two through holes DD811a and DD811b of the button base DD811 in conjunction with the pressing of the first member DD812 by the player. A light shielding piece DD8151 provided at an intermediate portion of the second member DD815 attached between the two sliding parts DD8124a and DD8124b extending from the two through holes DD811a and DD811b comprises the light emitting part DD814a and the light receiving part DD814b. It is possible to cut off between crossings.

  (28-3) The first member DD812 having a larger shape than the through holes DD811a and DD811b restricts the first member DD812 from coming out of the through holes DD811a and DD811b toward the second member DD815. The unauthorized removal of the maximum BET button DD8 can be further prevented.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-44199, there is known a gaming machine in which a front door is separated into an upper door and a lower door, and each can be opened and closed. According to such a gaming machine, only necessary portions can be opened and closed, such as at the time of medal supply (opening and closing of the lower door) and adjustment of the mechanical reel (opening and closing of the upper door), and the inside of the gaming machine is unnecessarily unnecessary. Exposure can be prevented (security improvement).

  By the way, in recent years, in order to simplify parts of the gaming machine, recycling and the like, unitization of an operation device, a rendering device and the like has been performed.

  Here, for example, the unitized rendering device is stored in the space on the housing side corresponding to the upper door. By doing this, it is possible to facilitate replacement of the rendering device at the time of model change and recycling.

  However, when the unitized rendering device is large, the upper door (or the lower door) may get in the way during model change or recycling.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly inserting and removing a device stored inside the gaming machine.

(29-1) One of the present invention is
The cabinet G has shafts UH21 and UH22, and engaging recesses UH23 and UH24,
The upper door mechanism DU which can be opened and closed with respect to the cabinet G is
Bearing portions UH121 and UH131 rotatably superposed on the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and slidable with respect to the axis UH121A of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22;
Until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement recesses UH23 and UH24 are engaged, and the sliding of the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is restricted, and the upper door mechanism DU for the cabinet G Engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 which are disengaged from the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 when opening beyond a predetermined angle,
It is a game machine 1 characterized by having.

According to the above configuration, the engaging convex portions UH15 and UH16 engage with the engaging concave portions UH23 and UH24 until the upper door mechanism DU opens at a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 It restricts sliding along the axis UH121A of the parts UH21 and UH22. As a result, it is possible to restrict the release of the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 and to lock the removal of the upper door mechanism DU from the cabinet G.
On the other hand, when the upper door mechanism DU opens more than a predetermined angle with respect to the cabinet G, the engagement of the engagement convex portions UH15 and UH16 with the engagement concave portions UH23 and UH24 is released, and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 are the shaft portion UH21. -It becomes slidable along axis UH121A of UH22. As a result, the polymerization of the shaft portions UH21 and UH22 and the bearing portions UH121 and UH131 is released, and the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G.
That is, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G only when the upper door mechanism DU is opened at a predetermined angle or more with respect to the cabinet G.

  (29-2) According to the present invention, in the above-mentioned gaming machine 1, the upper door mechanism DU is in the closed state with respect to the cabinet G and in the open state with the cabinet G opened 90 °. The predetermined angle is larger than the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the closed state, and smaller than 90 ° which is the angle of the upper door mechanism DU in the open state.

  According to the above configuration, the upper door mechanism DU can be removed from the cabinet G without opening the upper door mechanism DU to the open state (90 ° open).

(30-1) A door that can open and close the front side of the housing,
A left end light emitting mechanism which is disposed at the left end of the door and guides light to emit light to the left end region of the door;
A right end light emitting mechanism disposed at the right end portion of the door and guiding light to the right end region of the door to emit light;
A central light emitting substrate disposed at a central portion of the door and emitting light;
A light guiding mechanism is provided for guiding the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of a left peripheral area on the left end area side and a right peripheral area on the right end area side.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device capable of performing rendering by operating a movable body is known (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-178268). According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform powerful effects which can not be obtained only by the image etc. displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect. Generally, game machines are installed side by side on installation islands in a game arcade, so the size of the game machines is limited. However, when a plurality of rendering devices are provided, there is a possibility that a sufficient space for the configuration including the reflecting plate and the light transmitting plate for the effect of light by the conventional LED can not be obtained. According to the above configuration, by guiding the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate to at least one of the left peripheral area and the left peripheral area by the light guiding mechanism, it is difficult to guide light by the left end light emitting mechanism or the right end light emitting mechanism Even in the region, light can be emitted. Thereby, even if it is a door of a limited space, it is possible to perform effects of light at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-2) The central light emitting substrate is provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface, respectively.
An upper light guiding mechanism for guiding light from the upper light source to a position separated from the central portion; and a lower light guiding mechanism for guiding light from the lower light source to a position separated from the central portion Have.

  According to the above configuration, the left peripheral region and the right peripheral region can be made to emit light by the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism using the upper light source and the lower light source of the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate, The left peripheral area and the right peripheral area can be expanded to a wider range or place. Thereby, even if it is a door of a limited space, it is possible to perform effects of light at a plurality of places with a higher effect.

(30-3) a door (upper door mechanism UD) capable of opening and closing the front side of the housing;
A left end light emitting mechanism HA2 disposed at the left end portion of the door and emitting planarly the left end region of the door;
A right end light emitting mechanism HA3 disposed at the right end portion of the door and emitting planarly the right end region of the door;
And a central light emitting mechanism HA4 disposed at a central portion of the door;
The central light emitting mechanism is
A central light emitting substrate (top lens middle LED substrate HA 411) provided with an upper light source and a lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface,
An upper light guide mechanism (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) for guiding light from the upper light source provided on the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate to the upper light guide region and emitting light in a planar shape;
Lower light guiding mechanism (right down light lens HA 415, left down light lens) for guiding light from the lower light source provided on the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate to the lower light guiding area to emit light in a planar shape And.

  According to the above configuration, the central light emitting substrate of the central light emitting mechanism has the upper light source and the lower light source on the upper surface and the lower surface respectively, and these light sources are respectively the upper light guiding region and the upper light guiding region The lower light guide area emits light in a plane. Thus, in addition to the left end region by the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end region by the right end light emitting mechanism, the upper light guiding region and the lower light guiding region can be emitted by one central light emitting mechanism. Even with a door, it is possible to perform rendering of light at a plurality of locations with higher rendering effects.

(30-4) The upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism are disposed symmetrically about the central light emitting substrate.

  According to the above configuration, since the upper light guiding region and the lower light guiding region are symmetrical with respect to the center light emitting substrate, even if the door is a limited space, effects of light at a plurality of places are provided. , Can be done with higher rendering effects.

(30-5) The upper light guiding mechanism includes an upper reflector (the top lens reflector HA412, the top lens LED substrate concealing member HA16) covering the upper surface of the central light emitting substrate and the upper light source, and the upper reflector and the center It has an upper light guide lens (left light guide lens HA413, right light guide lens HA414) disposed respectively on the right side and left side of the gap with the light emitting substrate and disposed up to the upper light guide region,
The lower light guiding mechanism includes a lower reflector that covers the lower surface of the central light emitting substrate and the lower light source, the lower reflector (the top lens reflector HA412, the top lens LED substrate concealing member HA16), and the central light emission. It has a lower side light guide lens ((right down light lens HA 415, left down light lens) arranged on the side of the gap with the substrate and arranged up to the lower light guide area.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize effects of light at a plurality of places by a simple configuration of a reflector and a light guiding lens.

(30-6) The upper side light guide mechanism is arranged to emit light as the upper side light guide area, with the left end area of the door and each area on the center side from the right end area,
The lower light guide mechanism is arranged to emit light as lower light guide regions above the upper speakers respectively arranged at the upper left and upper right portions of the door.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to cause the upper light guiding mechanism and the lower light guiding mechanism to emit light in a region where light can not be sufficiently emitted depending on the left end light emitting mechanism and the right end light emitting mechanism.

(31-1) A gaming machine having a rendering device (screen mechanism D) disposed at the center of the front surface of a case (casing 2) and a light emitting unit (left panel mechanism HJ) disposed to the side of the rendering device And
The light emitting unit is
A light source device (left LED substrate HJ1) capable of emitting light to the front direction side and the rear surface direction side of the housing;
A dividing member (dividing mechanism HJ2) for dividing the light to the front direction side into two and guiding the light divided to one side to one side direction of the housing;
A side light transmitting member (upper left side lens HJ3) which constitutes a part of one side surface of the casing and transmits the light divided into the one part guided by the partition member;
A front light transmitting member (lower left lens HJ) which constitutes a part of the front surface of the housing and transmits light divided into the other by the partition member;
An inner light guide member (inner light guide member HJ5) for guiding the light toward the rear surface direction to the direction in which the effect device is disposed;
Have.

  BACKGROUND Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device capable of performing rendering by operating a movable body is known (see Patent Document 1). According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform powerful effects which can not be obtained only by the image etc. displayed on the liquid crystal display device through the movement of the movable body. In recent years, it has been required to provide a plurality of such effect devices to further enhance the effect.

  Generally, game machines are installed side by side on installation islands in a game arcade, so the size of the game machines is limited. However, when a plurality of rendering devices or a rendering device occupying a large space is provided, there is a risk that sufficient space for a configuration including a reflecting plate or a light transmitting plate for rendering light by a conventional LED may not be obtained. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the light emitted from the light source device to the front direction side of the housing is divided into two, one is guided by the partition member to one side direction of the housing and transmitted from the side light transmitting member, The other is transmitted from the front light transmitting member. Moreover, the light radiate | emitted from the light source device to the back surface direction side of a housing | casing is light-guided by the light guide member to the presentation apparatus side. As a result, only by providing the light emitting unit on the side surface, it is possible not only to realize the effect light from the front surface and the side surface of the gaming machine casing but also possible to irradiate the light to the effect device side. As a result, the configuration relating to the effect light in the gaming machine can be saved in space, and enlargement of the effect device can be permitted.

(31-2) The inner light guide member is
A light transmitting member (left light guide plate HJ51) capable of transmitting light, to which light to the rear surface direction side of the light source device is incident and disposed from the incident position to the periphery of the front surface of the rendering device;
A reflection member (left LED substrate cover HJ52) disposed in engagement with the back side of the light transmission member;
Have
The light transmitting member is
A projecting portion (projecting portion HJ 511 a) having a shape projecting to the light source device, disposed in the traveling direction of light to the back surface direction side of the light source device, and into which light to the back surface direction side of the light source device is incident When,
It is a wall surface engaged with the reflecting member of the light transmitting member, and is disposed in the traveling direction of light incident on the projecting portion, and the reflecting surface is inclined in the direction toward the rendering device side and incident on the projecting portion An inclined surface (inclined surface HJ 511 c) that reflects the reflected light toward the rendering device,
An optical path portion (optical path portion HJ 512) having a shape in which the light reflected by the inclined surface travels and is bent with respect to the traveling direction of the light;
A light emitting portion (light emitting portion HJ513) which is formed at an end of the light path portion in the traveling direction of the light, and whose cross section in front view has a zigzag shape;
have.

  According to the above configuration, the traveling direction of the light to the rear surface direction side of the light source device is changed to the rendering device side by the reflecting portion after being incident on the projecting portion. The reflective portion is disposed in engagement with the reflective member so that light is reflected into the inner light guide member. Then, the reflected light passes through an optical path portion having a bent shape, and then reaches the light emitting portion in a zigzag shape. As a result, the light emitting portion is irregularly refracted. As a result, the light traveling from the light source of the light emitting device is emitted to the outside in various ways, which can enhance the effect.

(32-1) A corner light transmitting member (upper left panel mechanism HB) disposed at an angular position on the front side of the upper surface of the housing;
A support member (panel base HH) located behind the corner light transmission member;
An outer wall member (top lens cover HA11) adjacent to the corner light transmitting member and engaged with the adjacent portion;
Have
The corner light transmitting member is
A fitting portion (fitting portion HB11) into which a protrusion (tight screw HH4) disposed to protrude in the front direction from the support member is fitted at the rear surface side position;
A notch which is disposed at the adjacent portion on the front side of the fitting portion, is a direction different from the fitting direction of the fitting portion, and protrudes in a direction toward the outer wall member from the placement portion and formed in the outer wall member Locking pieces (locking pieces HB12, HB13, HB14) engaged with (notches HA111, HA112, HA113);
have.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a rendering device capable of performing various effects is known. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-013685, a powerful effect that is difficult to obtain only with a video or the like displayed on a liquid crystal display device through movement of a movable body is intended. In such a gaming machine, it is known that the side surface and a part of the front face of the gaming machine are constituted by a translucent member, and the rendering effect is further enhanced by irradiating this with a light source from the inside of the gaming machine. .

  However, when the fixing member is simply fixed by a fixing member such as a screw, since the light transmitting member transmits light, the fixing member is visually recognized from the outside, and there is a problem that the appearance of the gaming machine is remarkably impaired. In addition, when the light transmitting member is extended to a place where it is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside and fixed by the fixing member, there is a problem that the installation of a plurality of rendering devices as described above and rendering devices occupying a large space is restricted. there were.

  According to the above configuration, the light transmitting member is adjacent to the outer wall member in the engaged state, and the locking piece of the light transmitting member is engaged with the notch of the outer wall member. Then, the projecting portion is disposed in the front direction from the support member, whereby the projecting portion is fitted into the fitting portion of the light transmitting member. Since the projection is fitted in the fitting portion of the light transmitting member, the movement of the light transmitting member in the vertical direction is restricted. Furthermore, since the fitting direction in the projecting portion and the projecting direction of the locking piece are arranged differently, the horizontal movement of the light transmitting member is restricted by the support member and the outer wall member. As a result, the light transmitting member can be easily attached to the gaming machine without impairing the appearance of the gaming machine without using the fixing member.

(32-2)
It further has a frame member (frame part HB2) for supporting the corner part light transmitting member in the vertical direction,
The corner light transmitting member has a restricting portion (restricting portion HB21) which extends to the rear position of the frame member along the frame member at the vertically lower position and restricts the forward movement of the frame member. doing

  According to the above configuration, since the light transmitting member is supported by the frame member in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the stress in the vertical direction with respect to the projecting portion and the fitting portion into which the projecting portion is fitted. Furthermore, since the restricting portion of the light transmitting member is disposed at the rear position of the frame member, the forward movement of the light transmitting member itself is restricted, and the stress in the horizontal direction with respect to the locking piece and the notch is reduced. it can. Thereby, deterioration of the light transmitting member and the structure related to the light transmitting member can be reduced.

(33-1) A door that can open and close the front side of the case,
And a decorative protrusion protruding forward from the top of the door;
The decorative convex portion is provided with a light guide plate (top lens light guide plate HA14) of a seamless structure that diffuses light and uniformly emits light from the surface of the decorative convex portion from the front end to the rear end of the decorative convex It is formed by the decoration unit HA1.

  Conventionally, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-245279, there is known a gaming machine provided with a rendering device on the front door. According to such a game machine, it is possible to perform various effects using the effect device, and the interest of the game can be improved. Since the front door faces the player, it is necessary to secure durability because it is in a state of being easily subjected to external force by contact with the player, but if emphasis is placed on the arrangement and design of the rendering device, the front door There was a problem that durability decreased. In particular, in the case of providing a protruding portion projecting on the front surface, the possibility of contact is increased, so that more durability is required.

  According to the above configuration, when a plurality of parts are joined to form the light guide plate of the decoration unit, the load is concentrated on the joint portion of the light guide pieces between the parts. For example, it is possible to avoid the situation where the load is concentrated on a part. As a result, the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit having the light guide plate of the seamless structure has a large rigidity and strength as a whole, and thus an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. Even in such a case, it becomes difficult to cause deformation or breakage, and as a result, it is possible to increase the durability of the door.

(33-2) The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by the top lens light guide plate base HA15 connected to the frame of the door, and the top lens cover HA11 that transmits the light to the outside, and the light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion;
The front region is curved downward, and the width in the left-right direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and the front end central portion is formed to have an apex.
The back surface of the front area and the frame of the door are connected by a decoration unit support mechanism arranged horizontally.

  According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the light guide plate are simply stacked by housing the light guide plate in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover. It is possible to form a decorative convex portion that is higher in rigidity than in the case of the plate shape. Also, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end away from the rear end connected to the frame of the door, but by reducing the width in the lateral direction on the front end side to reduce the weight, the rigidity of the front region and It is possible to increase the strength. Further, the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit curved downward is connected to the frame of the door via the decoration unit support mechanism arranged horizontally, whereby the back surface of the front area of the decoration unit is supported by the decoration unit support structure Horizontally supported, the front region has a large rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. Thereby, even when external force is applied from the player or the like to the decorative convex portion formed by the decorative unit, it becomes difficult to deform or break, and as a result, the durability of the door can be made high. It has become.

(33-3) A door that can open and close the front side of the case,
And a decorative protrusion protruding forward from the top of the door;
The decorative convex portion is
A top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door, a top lens light guide plate HA14 for diffusing light and uniformly emitting light from the surface, and a top lens cover for transmitting the light to the outside
The width of the horizontal direction is reduced from the door side to the front end side, and the decorative unit is formed in a shape having an apex at the center of the front end.

  According to the above configuration, the bending moment increases as it approaches the front end moving away from the rear end connected to the frame of the door, but the rigidity is reduced by reducing the width in the lateral direction of the front end and reducing weight. And it is possible to increase the strength. As a result, the decorative convex portion has high rigidity and strength in the front region, so that deformation or breakage is less likely to occur even when an external force is applied by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to make the door more durable.

(33-4) The decoration unit is
The top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover form a hollow portion, and the top lens light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion.

  According to the above configuration, the top lens light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion formed by the top lens light guide plate base and the top lens cover, thereby simplifying the top lens light guide plate base, the top lens cover, and the top lens light guide plate. Since it becomes a form with a large cross-sectional secondary moment compared with the case where it laminates | stacks to plate shape, a highly rigid decorative convex part can be formed.

(33-5) In the decoration unit, the front area is curved downward,
The back surface of the front area in the decoration unit and the frame of the door are connected by a decoration unit support mechanism arranged horizontally.

  According to the above configuration, the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit is decorated by the back surface of the front region of the decoration unit curved downward being connected to the frame of the door via the decoration unit support mechanism horizontally disposed. The unit is supported by the unit support mechanism in the horizontal direction. As a result, the decorative convex portion having the decorative unit and the decorative unit support mechanism is given external force by contact with a player located in front of the gaming machine, because the front region has high rigidity and strength in the front-rear direction. Even in such a case, it becomes difficult to cause deformation or breakage, and as a result, it is possible to increase the durability of the door.

(33-6) Behind the decorative convex portion, there is disposed an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light in the direction of a screen device C disposed obliquely downward and back.

  According to the above configuration, since a large space can be secured behind the decorative convex portion, the degree of freedom of the size and arrangement of the irradiation light device can be expanded, and the rigidity and strength of the decorative convex portion are high. , The irradiation light device can be sufficiently protected.

  According to the above-described gaming machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments, the projector mechanism B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are at predetermined positions in the display unit A. It is fixed. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the reflection direction of light, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet 21. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet 21 of the gaming machine 1, the light reflecting direction (angle) can be changed by loosening or tightening the screw while the upper door mechanism UD is open. It can be adjusted. Thereby, even when the position of the image projected by the projector mechanism B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the projector mechanism B2, the mirror mechanism B3, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have been described as being unitized. However, the projector mechanism, the mirror mechanism, and the various screens may be directly attached to the main body of the gaming machine without being unitized.

  In the first and second embodiments described above, the present invention is applied to a pachislot machine, but the present invention is applied to other game machines (for example, pachinko machines and slot machines). It is also possible.

  As described above, the first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described, but they are merely specific examples and do not limit the present invention in particular, and specific configurations of each means and the like can be appropriately designed and changed. is there. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention is not.

  Also, in the above detailed description, characteristic parts are mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and the scope of application thereof is diverse. Further, the terms and wording used in the present specification are used to properly describe the present invention, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, it would be easy for a person skilled in the art to reconsider other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described herein. Therefore, the description of the claims should be considered to include equivalent configurations without departing from the scope of the technical concept of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical content and the essence of the present application by the Patent Office and general public organizations, and engineers who belong to this technical field who is not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. To make it possible to make a prompt decision. Accordingly, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be assessed by the recitation of the claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the specific effects of the present invention, it is desirable that the present invention be interpreted with sufficient consideration to the documents and the like already disclosed.

  The above detailed description includes a computer-implemented process. The above description and expressions have been set forth for the purpose of being most efficiently understood by those skilled in the art. As used herein, each process used to derive one result should be understood as a process that is not self-consistent. In each process, transmission and reception of electric or magnetic signals, recording, and the like are performed. In the processing in each processing, such signals are expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are merely used for the convenience of description. There is a need. Moreover, although the process in each process may be described by the expression common to human action, the process demonstrated in this specification is basically performed by various apparatuses. Also, other configurations required to perform each process are obvious from the above description.

1 game machine 21 cabinet A display unit B irradiation light device C screen device D fixed screen mechanism E1 front screen mechanism F1 reel screen mechanism UD upper door mechanism DD lower door mechanism

Claims (2)

With the door which can open and close the front side of the case,
And a decorative protrusion protruding forward from the top of the door;
The decorative convex portion, the light guide plate seamless structure for uniformly released from the decorative surface of the protrusion by diffusing light is formed by the decoration unit provided over the rear end from the front end of the decorative protrusion ,
The decoration unit is
A hollow portion is formed by a top lens light guide plate base connected to the frame of the door, and a top lens cover that transmits the light to the outside, and the light guide plate is accommodated in the hollow portion.
A game machine characterized by The decorative unit,
Curved front side region downward, and the door lateral width toward the front end side from the side is decreased, is formed into a shape having a vertex at the front end central portion,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the back surface of the front area and the frame of the door are connected by a decoration unit support mechanism arranged horizontally.